<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<Search><pages Count="212"><page Index="1"><![CDATA[2022 Yamaha Boat

                                                   AR250 / SX250


                                                        252S / 252SE


                                                   252XE / 252SD







                                OWNER’S/OPERATOR’S MANUAL























                                                                              U.S.A. Edition



                               Read this manual carefully                      LIT-18626-13-47
                         before operating this boat.                              F4Y-F8199-11]]></page><page Index="2"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 1  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM




















                                              WARNING:
                                                                             Operating, servicing
                                         and maintaining a recreational marine
                                         vessel can expose you to chemicals
                                         including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
                                         phthalates, and lead, which are known to
                                         the State of California to cause cancer and
                                         birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
                                         minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
                                         service your vessel in a well-ventilated area
                                         and wear gloves or wash your hands
                                         frequently when servicing this vessel.
                                         For more information go to
                                         www.P65warnings.ca.gov/marine

























                        Read this manual carefully before operating this boat. This manual should stay
                        with the boat if it is sold.]]></page><page Index="3"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 1  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                    Important manual information

                                  To the owner                     Engine data recording
                        Thank you for choosing a Yamaha boat. This  This model’s ECM stores certain engine data
                        owner’s/operator’s manual contains informa-  to assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions and
                        tion you will need for proper operation, main-  for research, statistical analysis and develop-
                        tenance, and care. A thorough understanding  ment purposes.
                        of these simple instructions will help you to  Although the sensors and recorded data will
                        obtain maximum enjoyment from your new  vary by model, the main data points are:
                        Yamaha. If you have any questions about the   Engine status and  engine  performance
                        operation or maintenance of  your boat,  data
                        please consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.  This data will be uploaded only when a spe-
                        In this manual, information of particular im-  cial Yamaha diagnostic tool is attached to the
                        portance  is distinguished in the following  engine, such as when maintenance checks or
                        ways:                                 service procedures are performed.
                                                              Yamaha will not disclose this data to a third
                            This is the safety alert symbol. It is used  party except in the following cases. In addi-
                        to alert you to potential personal injury haz-  tion, Yamaha may provide engine data to a
                        ards. Obey all safety messages that follow  contractor in order to outsource services re-
                        this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.  lated to the handling of the engine data. Even
                                                              in this case, Yamaha will require the contrac-
                             WARNING
                                                              tor to properly handle the engine data  we
                        A WARNING indicates a hazardous situa-  provided and Yamaha  will appropriately
                        tion which, if not avoided, could result in  manage the data.
                        death or serious injury.               With the consent of the boat owner
                                                               Where obligated by law
                         NOTICE                                For use by Yamaha in litigation
                        A NOTICE  indicates special precautions   For general  Yamaha-conducted research
                        that must be taken to avoid damage to the  purposes when the data is not related to an
                        boat or other property.                individual engine or owner

                        TIP:
                        A TIP provides key information to make pro-
                        cedures easier or clearer.]]></page><page Index="4"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 2  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Important manual information



                        Because Yamaha has a policy of continuing
                        product improvement, this product may not
                        be exactly as described in this owner’s/oper-
                        ator’s manual. Specifications are subject to
                        change without notice.
                        This manual should be considered a perma-
                        nent part of this boat and should remain with
                        it even if the boat is subsequently sold.


                                    AR250 / SX250
                             252S / 252SE / 252XE / 252SD
                           OWNER’S/OPERATOR’S MANUAL
                          ©2022 by Yamaha Motor Corporation,
                                       U.S.A.
                                 1st Edition, May 2021
                                  All rights reserved.
                           Any reprinting or unauthorized use
                            without the written permission of
                           Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A.
                                is expressly prohibited.
                                   Printed in U.S.A.
                                 P/N LIT-18626-13-47]]></page><page Index="5"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 1  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                       Table of contents

                        General and important labels...........1  Batteries and battery switches ... 37
                          Identification number records..........1  Main switches
                                                                   (AR250 / SX250 / 252S)........... 39
                            Primary Identification (PRI-ID)
                             number.......................................1  Main switch (252SE / 252XE /
                            Hull Identification Number (HIN) ...1  252SD)..................................... 39
                            Engine serial numbers...................1  “START/STOP” buttons
                          Emission control information ...........2  (252SE / 252XE / 252SD)......... 39
                                                                 Remote control levers................. 40
                            Approval labels of emission          Throttle/shift paddles (252SD).... 42
                             control certificate .......................2  Steering ...................................... 43
                            Manufactured date labels .............3  Tilt lever ...................................... 44
                            Star labels (4-star models) ............3
                          Important labels ...............................6
                                                              Instrument operation ....................... 45
                            Warning labels ..............................8
                            Other labels.................................12  Helm controls (AR250 / SX250) ..... 45
                                                                 Switch panel ............................... 46
                                                               Multi-function display unit
                        Safety information.............................13
                                                                 operation..................................... 46
                          Limitations on who may operate
                                                                 Touching the multi-function
                            the boat.......................................13
                                                                   display ..................................... 46
                          Cruising limitations.........................14
                                                                 Using the joystick ....................... 46
                          Operational requirements ..............15  Operation buttons.......................... 48
                          Required equipment.......................16  Controller.................................... 48
                          Additional equipment                   Operating the boat at a steady
                            recommendations .......................17  speed (cruise assist) ................ 48
                                                                 Operating the boat with a
                          Hazard information.........................17
                                                                   minimal wake
                          Boat characteristics .......................18
                                                                   (no-wake mode)....................... 49
                          Night operation ..............................19  Operating the boat in reverse
                          Wakeboarding and water-skiing ....19     with more thrust
                          Rules of the road............................20  (reverse RPM control) .............. 49
                                                               Multi-function display elements..... 51
                          To get more boating safety
                                                                 Static bar .................................... 52
                            information ..................................25
                                                                 Center display............................. 53
                          Enjoy your boat responsibly...........25
                                                                 Screen tab bar ............................ 53
                                                                 Status indicator bar .................... 54
                        Description.......................................26  Home screen ................................. 55
                          Boat glossary .................................26  Map screen.................................... 55
                          Location of main components .......27  Waypoint..................................... 56
                            Exterior components...................27  Map settings screen ................... 57
                            Seats & interior components.......29  Trip screen..................................... 59
                            Stern components ......................32  Media screen ................................. 60
                            Helm components.......................33  Radio screen (AM/FM)................ 60
                            Engine components ....................36  Weather screen........................... 61
                                                                 Bluetooth screen ........................ 61
                        Control function operation .............37  Auxiliary screen........................... 62
                          Boat control functions....................37  Zone control screen.................... 62
                                                               System control screen................... 63
                            Engine shut-off switch ................37]]></page><page Index="6"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 2  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Table of contents

                          Setting screen ................................63  Radio screen (AM/FM)................ 87
                            Time setting screen.....................63  Weather screen........................... 88
                            Depth alarm setting screen.........64  Bluetooth screen ........................ 88
                            Unit setting screen......................64  Auxiliary screen........................... 88
                            Brightness setting screen ...........64  Zone control screen.................... 89
                            Maintenance setting screen........65  System control screen................... 89
                            Language setting screen.............65  Setting screen................................ 90
                            Tuner Region setting screen .......65  Time setting screen .................... 90
                          Warnings ........................................66  Depth alarm setting screen......... 91
                            Check engine warning ................68  Unit setting screen...................... 91
                            Low oil pressure warning............68  Brightness setting screen........... 91
                            Over temperature warning ..........68  Maintenance setting screen ....... 92
                            House/Start Battery voltage          Language setting screen ............ 92
                             warning ....................................69  Tuner Region setting screen....... 92
                            Communication error warning ....69   Flush-out ballasts (252XE).......... 92
                            Low fuel level warning.................69  Warnings........................................ 94
                            Depth warning.............................69  Check engine warning ................ 96
                          Helm controls (252S / 252SE /          Low oil pressure warning............ 96
                            252XE / 252SD)...........................70  Over temperature warning.......... 96
                            Switch panel (252S / 252SE /         Low/High voltage warning.......... 97
                             252SD) .....................................71  Communication error warning .... 97
                          Multi-function display unit            Low fuel level warning ................ 97
                                                                 Depth warning ............................ 97
                            operation.....................................72
                            Touching the multi-function
                             display......................................72  Equipment operation ...................... 98
                            Using the joystick........................72  Seats.............................................. 98
                          Operation buttons ..........................73  Driver’s seat................................ 99
                            Controller ....................................73  Passenger’s seat ...................... 101
                            Operating the boat at a steady       Engine hood seat...................... 101
                             speed (cruise assist) ................73  Swim platform seat
                            Operating the boat with a              (252S / 252SE / 252SD)......... 101
                             minimal wake                        Underwater seats ..................... 102
                             (no-wake mode) .......................74  Engine hood................................. 103
                            Operating the boat in reverse      Storage compartments................ 103
                             with more thrust                    Anchor storage compartment... 103
                             (reverse RPM control) ..............75  Front underseat storage
                          Multi-function display elements.....76   compartments ....................... 104
                            Screen tab bar ............................77  Ski locker.................................. 104
                            Status indicator bar.....................78  Rear underseat storage
                            Operation mode ..........................79  compartment (starboard)....... 105
                          Home screen..................................80  Rear underseat storage
                          Map screen ....................................80  compartment (port)................ 106
                                                                 Enclosed head compartment ... 106
                            Waypoint.....................................80
                            Map settings screen....................82  Driver’s side console
                          Trip screen .....................................84  compartment ......................... 107
                                                                 Stowable table.......................... 108
                          Drive control screen.......................85
                                                                 Glove compartment.................. 108
                          Media screen..................................86]]></page><page Index="7"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 3  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                       Table of contents

                            Galley storage compartment           Trailering with the bimini top .... 130
                             (252S / 252SE / 252XE /             Removing the bimini top........... 131
                             252SD) ...................................109  Installing the bimini top............. 131
                            Wet storage compartment ........110
                            Stern storage compartments ....110  Operation and handling
                          Walk-through ...............................111
                                                              requirements................................... 132
                            Front walk-through....................111  Fuel requirement.......................... 132
                            Rear walk-through ....................111
                          Windshield....................................112  Fuel ........................................... 132
                                                               Engine oil requirement................. 133
                            Folding mirror (252XE) ..............112
                          Anchor light (AR250) ....................113  Engine oil .................................. 133
                                                               Draining the bilge water............... 136
                          Anchor light (252S / 252SE /
                                                                 Draining the bilge water on
                            252XE / 252SD).........................113
                                                                   land........................................ 136
                          Anchor light (SX250).....................114  Draining the bilge water on
                          Bow ladder...................................115  water...................................... 137
                          Swim platform..............................116
                            Stern ladder ..............................116  First-time operation ....................... 139
                            Swim platform shower (252S /       Engine break-in............................ 139
                             252SE / 252SD)......................117
                          Remote control keypad................119
                                                              Pre-operation checks................... 140
                            Side table ..................................119  Pre-operation checklist............. 140
                          USB chargers...............................120
                                                               Pre-operation check points ......... 141
                          Wakeboard tower
                                                                 Pre-launch checks.................... 141
                            (except for SX250).....................121  Steering system checks ........... 141
                            Collapsing and setting up the        Remote control lever checks.... 141
                             wakeboard tower                     Throttle/shift paddle checks
                             (AR250 / 252S / 252XE) .........121   (252SD) .................................. 142
                            Collapsing and setting up the        Fire extinguisher check............. 142
                             wakeboard tower (252SE /            Access port cap check............. 144
                             252SD) ...................................122  Jet intake checks...................... 144
                          Bimini top                             Fuel system checks .................. 144
                            (AR250 / 252S / 252XE) ............123  Engine oil level check ............... 145
                                                                 Battery check............................ 146
                            Setting up the bimini top...........123
                            Storing the bimini top................125  Bilge water check ..................... 146
                            Trailering with the bimini top.....126  Drain plug check....................... 146
                            Removing the bimini top...........126  Blower checks .......................... 147
                            Installing the bimini top.............127  Navigation and anchor lights
                          Bimini top (252SE / 252SD)..........127  checks ................................... 148
                                                                 Horn check ............................... 149
                            Removing the bimini top...........127  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                            Installing the bimini top.............128  check ..................................... 150
                          Bimini top (SX250)........................128
                                                                 Post-launch checks.................. 150
                            Setting up the bimini top...........128  Engine shut-off switch check ... 150
                            Storing the bimini top in the        Cooling water pilot outlet
                             upright position......................129  check ..................................... 151
                            Storing the bimini top in the        Fuel level check ........................ 151
                             fully collapsed position ..........130]]></page><page Index="8"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 4  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Table of contents

                        Operation..........................................152  Specifications................................ 182
                          Driving your boat..........................152  Specifications .............................. 182
                            Getting to know your boat ........152
                            Learning to operate your          Trouble recovery............................. 185
                             boat........................................152  Troubleshooting........................... 185
                            Starting the engines..................152
                            Stopping the engines................155  Troubleshooting chart............... 185
                            Leaving a dock..........................156  Emergency procedures ............... 188
                            Turning the boat........................157  Jet pump clean-out
                            Boating with passengers ..........158  procedure .............................. 188
                            Stopping the boat .....................159  Raising the shift gates
                            Boarding from the water ...........160  (252SE / 252XE / 252SD)....... 190
                            Boarding from the bow .............160  Power steering system will not
                            Boarding from a dock or                operate (252SD)..................... 191
                             landing jetty............................160  Jump-starting ........................... 193
                            Docking.....................................160  Fuse replacement ..................... 194
                            Beaching ...................................162  Running on one engine............. 196
                            Anchoring..................................162  Towing the boat........................ 196
                            Crossing wakes and swells.......163
                          Post-operation checks.................164  Consumer information................... 197
                                                               Limited warranty .......................... 197
                        Trailering ..........................................166  YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE
                          Trailering the boat ........................166  (Y.E.S.) ...................................... 199
                            Hitch..........................................166  Sample float plan......................... 200
                            Trailering checklist ....................166
                            Backing your trailer ...................167  Index............................................... 201
                            Launching .................................168
                            Loading .....................................168
                            Lifting ........................................169

                        Care and storage.............................170
                          Post-operation care .....................170
                            Flushing the cooling system .....170
                            Cleaning the boat......................171
                            Basic stain guide.......................173
                            Battery care...............................174
                          Long-term storage .......................175
                            Fuel system...............................175
                            Lubrication ................................175
                            Grease points............................175
                        Maintenance ....................................177
                          Maintenance.................................177
                            Owner’s/operator’s manual ......177
                            Removing and installing the
                             engine covers.........................177
                            Periodic maintenance chart ......179]]></page><page Index="9"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 1  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                      General and important labels

                         Identification number records        Hull Identification Number (HIN)
                        Record your Primary  Identification (PRI-ID)  The HIN is stamped into the right rear corner
                        number, Hull Identification Number (HIN), and  of the hull.
                        engine serial numbers in the spaces provided
                        to assist you in ordering spare  parts  from
                        your Yamaha Boat Dealer. Also, record and
                        keep these ID numbers in a separate place in
                        case your boat is stolen.
                                                                                          1
                        Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number
                        The PRI-ID number is stamped on a label at-
                        tached inside the engine compartment. (See  YAMC
                        page 103 for engine hood opening and clos-
                        ing procedures.)                      1  Hull Identification Number (HIN)

                                                              Engine serial numbers
                                                              The engine serial numbers are stamped on a
                                                              label attached to each engine unit. (See page
                                                              103  for engine  hood opening and  closing
                                                              procedures.)
                              1



                                                                              1
                        1  Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number







                                                              1  Engine serial number

                                           PRI-I.D.
                          MODEL
                          YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.
                          ASSEMBLED IN U.S.A. WITH FOREIGN & DOMESTIC
                          COMPONENTS.
                          ASSEMBLÉ EN U.S. AVEC DES COMPOSANTS ÉTRANGERS ET
                          DOMESTIQUES.








                                                                                                1]]></page><page Index="10"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 2  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        General and important labels

                        Port side                              Emission control information
                                                              These engines conform to U.S. Environmen-
                                                              tal Protection Agency (EPA) and/or California
                                                              Air Resources Board (CARB) regulations for
                           YAMAHA                             marine SI engines applicable at the time of
                                                              manufacture.
                                                              The 4-star labels are affixed to models that
                                                              meet the  Air Resources  Board’s emission
                            YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                            MADE IN JAPAN                     standards for 4-star models. (See page 3 for
                            PAYS D’ORIGINE JAPON              information on the star labels.)
                                                              Star labels are not affixed to 3-star models.
                                                              These engines are certified to operate on reg-
                                                              ular unleaded gasoline.

                        Starboard side                        Approval labels of emission control
                                                              certificate
                                                              These labels are attached to each engine unit
                                                              and to the inside of the engine compartment.
                                                              (See page 103 for engine hood opening and
                           YAMAHA                             closing procedures and page 177 for engine
                                                              cover removal and installation procedures.)
                            YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.                            1
                            MADE IN JAPAN
                            PAYS D’ORIGINE JAPON










                                                              1  Emission control information label
                                                              3-star models

                                                               EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
                                                               THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO          U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS FOR SI MARINE
                                                               ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS AND
                                                               ADJUSTMENTS.
                                                               ENGINE FAMILY :  DISPLACEMENT :                                            liters
                                                               MAX POWER :                                    kW  EPA FEL : HC+NOx               , CO                g/kW-h
                                                               YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.




                        2]]></page><page Index="11"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 3  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                      General and important labels

                        4-star models                         Manufactured date labels
                                                              These labels are attached to  each engine
                          EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
                          THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO          CALIFORNIA AND U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS  unit. (See page 103 for engine hood opening
                          FOR SI MARINE ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE
                          SPECIFICATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS.
                          ENGINE FAMILY :  DISPLACEMENT :                                            liters  and closing procedures and page 177 for en-
                          MAX POWER :                                    kW  EPA/CA FEL : HC+NOx            , CO             g/kW-h
                                                              gine cover  removal and  installation proce-
                          YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.
                                                              dures.)
                                                                                        1









                                                       1
                                                              1  Manufactured date label
                        1  Emission control information label

                        3-star models
                         EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM INFORMATION
                         THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO       U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS FOR SI MARINE
                         ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS AND
                         ADJUSTMENTS. MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING CERTIFIED COMPONENTS.
                         ENGINE FAMILY:  DISPLACEMENT:                                    liters
                         MAX POWER:                                         kW  EPA FEL: HC+NOx            ,CO            g/kW-h
                         EPA CERTIFIED EVAP COMPONENTS:
                         YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                                                              Star labels (4-star models)
                        4-star models                         This boat is labeled with a California Air Re-
                                                              sources Board (CARB) star label. See below
                         EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM INFORMATION  TWC/HO25/MFI/OBD/EECS
                         THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO       CALIFORNIA AND U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS
                         FOR SI MARINE ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE  for a description of your particular label.
                         SPECIFICATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS. MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING
                         CERTIFIED COMPONENTS. MEETS        MY CALIFORNIA EVAP EMISSIONS.
                         REGULATIONS FOR SPARK-IGNITION MARINE WATERCRAFT.
                         ENGINE FAMILY:   DISPLACEMENT:                  liters
                         MAX POWER:                                   kW  EPA/CA FEL: HC+NOx             ,CO            g/kW-h
                         EPA CERTIFIED EVAP COMPONENTS:
                         ARB EVAP FAMILY:  ARB EVAP EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM:  1
                         YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.





                                                              1  Star label location




                                                                                                3]]></page><page Index="12"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 4  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        General and important labels

                                                              Two Stars - Very Low Emission
                                                              The two-star label  identifies engines  that
                                    1                         meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                                                              Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2004
                                                              exhaust emission standards. Engines meet-
                                                              ing these standards have 20% lower emis-
                                                              sions than One Star-Low Emission engines.





                        1  Star label location

                        One Star - Low Emission
                        The one-star label identifies engines that
                        meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                        Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2001
                        exhaust emission standards. Engines meet-
                        ing these standards have 75% lower emis-
                        sions than conventional carbureted two-  Three Stars - Ultra Low Emission
                        stroke engines. These engines are equivalent  The three-star label identifies engines that
                        to the U.S. EPA’s 2006 standards for marine  meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                        engines.                              Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2008
                                                              exhaust emission standards or the Sterndrive
                                                              and Inboard marine engine 2003-2008 ex-
                                                              haust emission standards. Engines meeting
                                                              these standards have 65% lower emissions
                                                              than One Star-Low Emission engines.























                        4]]></page><page Index="13"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 5  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                      General and important labels

                        Four Stars - Super Ultra Low Emission
                        The four-star label identifies engines  that
                        meet the Air Resources Board’s  Sterndrive
                        and Inboard  marine engine 2009 exhaust
                        emission standards. Personal Watercraft and
                        Outboard marine engines may also comply
                        with these standards. Engines meeting these
                        standards have 90% lower emissions  than
                        One Star-Low Emission engines.



















































                                                                                                5]]></page><page Index="14"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 6  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        General and important labels

                                                   Important labels
                        Read the following labels before operating this boat. If you need any additional information,
                        contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer.







                                   12



                                    11



                                                                                       13







                                                11       19

                          3-star models
                                                      14                               16
                                                 11





                            20
                                                                                          19
                          4-star models

                                             20
                                                                              11











                        6]]></page><page Index="15"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 7  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                      General and important labels




                               6


                                                                             17    1
                                                                       4










                                                          5                       2
                                                                          3
                                                                  15









                                     7          10                                 7














                                                                                   7
                                        7
                                            8                                9
                                                      18









                                                                                                7]]></page><page Index="16"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 8  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        General and important labels

                        Warning labels
                        If any of these labels is damaged or missing, contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer for a replacement.
                           1

























                           2
















                           3








                                                              F3A-U415P-20




                        8]]></page><page Index="17"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 9  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                      General and important labels


                           4












                           5









                           6


                               Visibility from the seated position at this helm
                                     station is limited.
                             Operation from a standing position may be necessary.
                               Avoid serious injury or death from collisions.
                                Maintain a lookout as required by USCG
                                     Navigation Rules.
                                    Read owners manual.
                           7
























                                                                                                9]]></page><page Index="18"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 10  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        General and important labels


                          8













                                                                 F3A-U415R-20
                          9













                          10












                          11                                   12
















                        10]]></page><page Index="19"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 11  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                      General and important labels



                          13







                                                          F1C-U416B-20
                           14
                           AR250/252S/252SE/252SD/252XE










                           15                                16
                           252XE


                           Improper use of the ballast system can
                           overload the boat, causing poor handling and
                           increased risk of swamping.                                       20
                           Ballast system adds 1685 lb (764 kg) when full.
                           Include this weight when making sure your
                           load does not exceed the weight shown on
                           the Maximum Capacities Label.


                           Drain ballast completely before trailering the
                           boat to reduce the risk of a towing accident.
                           The Increased weight of ballast can cause
                           unsafe towing conditions due to negative
                           tongue weight, including decreased tow
                           vehicle stability and greater chance of a
                           runaway trailer that has come off the hitch.













                                                                                               11]]></page><page Index="20"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 12  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        General and important labels

                        Other labels

                           17
                           Except for 252XE                   252XE
                           MAXIMUM CAPACITIES                 MAXIMUM CAPACITIES
                             12    PERSONS OR 2200   LBS.       12    PERSONS OR 2200   LBS.
                                2600 POUNDS, PERSONS, GEAR         2350 POUNDS, PERSONS, GEAR

                           THIS BOAT COMPLIES WITH U.S. COAST GUARD SAFETY  THIS BOAT COMPLIES WITH U.S. COAST GUARD SAFETY
                           STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF CERTIFICATION  STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF CERTIFICATION
                           MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING CERTIFIED COMPONENTS  MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING CERTIFIED COMPONENTS
                           MANUFACTURER: YAMAHA JET BOAT MANUFACTURING U.S.A., INC.  MANUFACTURER: YAMAHA JET BOAT MANUFACTURING U.S.A., INC.
                           MODEL:                   VONORE, TN  MODEL:                 VONORE, TN
                            DESIGN COMPLIANCE WITH NMMA REQUIREMENTS IS VERIFIED.  DESIGN COMPLIANCE WITH NMMA REQUIREMENTS IS VERIFIED.
                            MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBLE FOR PRODUCTION CONTROL.  MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBLE FOR PRODUCTION CONTROL.
                                      R                                  R
                                       NATIONAL MARINE                    NATIONAL MARINE
                                       MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION          MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION
                           18                                 19


















                           20
                            All applicable electrical system components installed as
                            original equipment meet appropriate U.S.C.G. requirements
                            for ignition protection. (Ref. 33 CFR 183.410 and 183.440)
                             YAMAHA                    60E-83627-00












                        12]]></page><page Index="21"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 13  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                                                                  Limitations on who may
                        The safe use and operation of this boat is    operate the boat
                        dependent upon the use of proper operat-   Yamaha recommends a minimum operator
                        ing techniques, as well as upon the com-  age of 16 years old.
                        mon sense, good judgment, and expertise  Adults must supervise use by minors.
                        of the operator. Every operator should  Know the operator age and training re-
                        know the following  requirements  before  quirements for your state. A boating safety
                        operating the boat.                    course is recommended  and may be  re-
                         Before operating the boat, read the own-  quired in your state. You can find local rules
                          er’s/operator’s manual,  the Operation  In-  by contacting the United States Coast
                          struction card, and all labels on the boat.  Guard (USCG), the National Association of
                          These materials should give you an under-  State Boating Law Administrators, or your
                          standing of the boat and its operation.  local Power Squadron.
                         Never allow anyone to  operate this boat   This boat is designed to carry the operator,
                          until they too have read this owner’s/oper-  up to 11 passengers, and cargo. Never ex-
                          ator’s manual, the Operation Instruction  ceed the maximum load limit or allow more
                          card, and all labels.                than 12 persons (or 11 persons if a wake-
                                                               boarder or water-skier is being pulled) to
                                                               ride in the boat at any time. Weight distri-
                                                               bution affects performance. Keep weight in
                                                               the boat low and evenly distributed from
                                                               side-to-side  and bow-to-stern. Remove
                                                               any unnecessary cargo and store it on
                                                               shore.

                                                                Maximum load (252XE):
                                                                  Total  weight  of cargo, operator, and
                                                                  passengers:
                                                                    1066 kg (2350 lb)
                                                                  Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                                  gers:
                                                                    998 kg (2200 lb)
                                                                Maximum load (except for 252XE):
                                                                  Total  weight  of cargo, operator, and
                                                                  passengers:
                                                                    1180 kg (2600 lb)
                                                                  Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                                  gers:
                                                                    998 kg (2200 lb)






                                                                                               13]]></page><page Index="22"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 14  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                            Safety information

                               Cruising limitations            This is a high-performance boat—not a toy.
                         Scan  constantly for people, objects,  and  Sharp turns or jumping wakes or waves
                          other watercraft. Be alert for conditions  can increase the risk of back/spinal injury
                          that limit your visibility or block your vision  (paralysis), facial injuries, and broken legs,
                          of others.                           ankles, and other  bones. Do not jump
                                                               wakes or waves.
                                                               Do not  operate  the boat  in rough water,
                                                               bad weather, or when visibility is poor; this
                                                               may lead to an accident causing injury or
                                                               death. Be alert to the possibility of adverse
                                                               weather. Take note of  weather  forecasts
                                                               and the prevailing weather conditions be-
                                                               fore setting out in your boat.
                                                               Never operate in water that is less than
                         Operate defensively at safe speeds and  90 cm (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the
                          keep a safe distance from people, objects,  boat, otherwise you increase your chance
                          and other watercraft.                of hitting a submerged object, which could
                         Do not follow directly behind other water-  result in injury.
                          craft.
                         Do not go near others to spray or splash
                          them with water.
                         Avoid sharp turns or other maneuvers that
                          make it hard for others to avoid you or un-
                          derstand where you are going.                    90 cm (3 ft)
                         Avoid  areas with  submerged objects or
                          shallow water.
                         Take early action to avoid collisions. Re-
                          member, boats do not have brakes.
                         Do not pull the remote control levers back   Leave a “float plan” with a responsible per-
                          to idle when trying to steer away from ob-  son on shore. Tell where you plan to go and
                          jects—you need throttle to steer. Always  when you plan to arrive, and provide a de-
                          check throttle, shift, and steering controls  scription of your boat. Advise this person if
                          for proper operation before starting boat.  your plans change and also when you ar-
                         Operate within your limits and avoid ag-  rive to prevent false alarms. A sample float
                          gressive maneuvers to reduce the risk of  plan is included on page 200.
                          loss of control, ejection, and collision.   Follow navigation rules and state and local
                                                               laws that apply to your boat.








                        14]]></page><page Index="23"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 15  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                           Operational requirements            Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) to
                         The operator and all passengers must wear  the PFD and keep it free from the steering
                          a U.S. Coast Guard (USCG) approved per-  wheel or other controls so that the engines
                          sonal flotation device (PFD).        stop if the operator accidentally leaves the
                                                               helm. Failure to attach the engine shut-off
                                                1              cord (lanyard) could  result in a runaway
                                                               boat if the operator is ejected.
                                                               After operation, remove the engine shut-off
                                                               cord (lanyard) and the main switch keys to
                                                               avoid accidental starting or unauthorized
                                                               use by children or others.

                                                              AR250 / SX250 / 252S


                        1  PFD                                             1

                         Eye protection is recommended to keep
                          wind, water, and glare from the sun out of                2
                          your eyes while you operate your boat. Re-
                          straining straps for eyewear are made
                          which are designed to  float should  your
                          eyewear fall in the water.
                         Never operate the boat after consuming al-
                          cohol or taking drugs.              1  Engine shut-off switch
                                                              2  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                         For reasons of safety and proper care of
                          the boat, always perform the pre-operation
                                                              252SE / 252XE / 252SD
                          checks listed on page 140 before operating
                          the boat.
                         Passengers must always sit in a designat-
                          ed seating area, place  feet  on the deck,                 2
                          and hold on to the handgrips, handrails, or
                          straps when the boat is in motion.
                         Always consult your doctor on whether it is    1
                          safe for you to ride in this boat if you are
                          pregnant or in poor health.
                         Do not attempt to modify this boat.
                          Modifications  to  your boat may reduce
                                                              1  Engine shut-off switch
                          safety and reliability, and render the boat
                                                              2  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          unsafe or illegal to use.




                                                                                               15]]></page><page Index="24"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 16  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                            Safety information

                         Scan  constantly  for swimmers and stay   Required equipment
                          away from swimming areas. Swimmers are  The  U.S. Coast Guard  (USCG) has  regula-
                          hard to see and you could accidentally hit  tions which describe minimum standards of
                          someone in the water.               safety. You must comply with these regula-
                         Avoid being hit by another boat. You  tions, which  apply to boats like your boat
                          should always take responsibility to watch  which are less than 26 feet long.
                          for traffic; other boaters may not be watch-   Personal flotation devices (PFD):
                          ing for you. If they do not see you, or you  Type I, II, or III as required for all people on
                          maneuver more quickly than other boaters  board (see “Operational requirements” for
                          expect, you risk a collision.        more information), plus at least one Type IV
                         Maintain a safe distance from other boats  (throwable type).
                          and watercraft, and  also watch  for  ski   Fire extinguisher:
                          ropes or fishing lines. Obey the “Rules of  At least one 5-B (B-1) type hand-held por-
                          the road”, and be sure to check behind you  table fire extinguisher.
                          before  making a turn.  (See  “Rules of the   Visual distress signals:
                          road” on page 20.)                   It is recommended that a USCG-approved
                                                               day/night pyrotechnic device be stored on
                                                               your boat. A mirror can also be used as an
                                                               emergency signal. Contact  your  Yamaha
                                                               Boat Dealer or the Coast Guard for more
                                                               information.
                                                               Sound signalling device:
                                                               Your boat is equipped with a horn that can
                                                               be used to signal other boats. See “Rules
                                                               of the road” for more information.
                                                               Navigation lights:
                                                               Your boat is equipped  with navigation
                                                               lights for use between sunset and sunrise,
                                                               and during periods of reduced visibility,
                                                               such as fog. Be sure these lights are work-
                                                               ing and  are turned on when  necessary.
                                                               (See pages 63, 89, and 113 for more infor-
                                                               mation.)














                        16]]></page><page Index="25"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 17  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                              Additional equipment                  Hazard information
                                recommendations               Never start the engines or let them run for any
                        The following equipment can help make your  length of time in an enclosed area. Exhaust
                        boating experience safer and more enjoy-  fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless,
                        able:                                 odorless gas that may cause loss of con-
                         Mooring fenders and lines.          sciousness and death within a short time. Al-
                         Anchor with suitable line (a “Danforth” type  ways operate the boat in an open area.
                          anchor and line that is at least 6 times the  It is also important to have the engines off
                          depth of the water where you will drop an-  when anyone is using the ladder on models
                          chor are recommended).              equipped with  one because of the carbon
                         Manual-type bilge pump.             monoxide in the exhaust gases coming from
                         First-aid kit.                      underneath the step.
                         Waterproof flashlight with extra batteries.
                         Tool kit with assorted screwdrivers, pliers,
                          wrenches (including metric  sizes), and
                          electrical tape.
                         Oar  or paddle  (look  for one with a  boat
                          hook on the other end).
                         Spare parts, such as fuses.
                         Navigation charts for the waters where you
                          will be boating.
                         Tow-rope.































                                                                                               17]]></page><page Index="26"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 18  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                            Safety information

                              Boat characteristics             Keep away from the intake grates while the
                         Jet thrust turns the boat. Moving the re-  engines  are on. Items such as  long  hair,
                          mote control levers completely back to idle  loose clothing, or PFD straps can become
                          or the neutral position produces only mini-  entangled in moving parts, resulting in se-
                          mum thrust. If you are traveling at speeds  vere injury or drowning.
                          above  trolling, you will have rapidly de-   Never insert any object into the jet thrust
                          creasing ability to steer without throttle.  nozzles while the engines are running. Se-
                          You may still have some turning ability im-  vere injury or death could result from com-
                          mediately after moving the remote control  ing in contact with the rotating parts of the
                          levers back to idle, but once the engines  jet pumps.
                          slow down, the boat will no longer respond
                          to steering  wheel input until  you apply
                          throttle again or you reach a trolling speed.
                          Practice turning in an open area without
                          obstructions until you have a good feel for                         2
                          the maneuver.
                         This  Yamaha boat is  water-jet propelled.
                          The pumps are directly connected to the       1
                          engines. This means that the jet thrust will
                          produce some  movement whenever  the
                          engines are running. The boat has a “neu-  1  Intake grate
                          tral” position, but since the boat is always  2  Jet thrust nozzle
                          producing thrust while the engines are run-
                          ning, some forward or reverse movement   Stop the engines and remove the clip from
                          may occur.                           the engine shut-off switch before removing
                         Do not use the reverse function  to slow  any debris or weeds, which may have col-
                          down or stop the boat above trolling speed  lected around the jet intakes. (See page
                          as it could cause you to lose control, be  188 for more information.)
                          ejected, or impact the steering wheel  or
                          other parts of the boat. This could increase
                          the risk of serious injury. It could also dam-
                          age the shift mechanisms.
                         Reverse can be used to slow down or stop
                          during slow-speed maneuvering, such as
                          when docking. Once the engines are idling,
                          shift to reverse and gradually increase en-
                          gine speed. Make sure that there are no
                          obstacles  or people behind you before
                          shifting into reverse.





                        18]]></page><page Index="27"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 19  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                                 Night operation                 Wakeboarding and water-
                        When using your boat before dawn or after           skiing
                        dusk, you must have both bow and anchor  You can use the boat to tow a wakeboarder
                        lights operating. When at anchor in the dark,  or water-skier, using the tow pylon or the ski
                        the anchor light must be lit. (See pages 63,  tow hook provided.
                        89, and 113 for instructions.)        It is the boat operator’s responsibility to be
                                                              alert to the safety of the wakeboarder or wa-
                                                              ter-skier and others. Know and follow all state
                                                              and local regulations in effect for the waters
                                                              in which you will be operating.
                                                              The following are some important consider-
                                                              ations for  minimizing risks while  pulling  a
                                                              wakeboarder or water-skier.
                                                               The wakeboarder or water-skier should
                                                               wear an approved PFD, preferably a bright-
                                                               ly colored one so boat operators can see
                                                               the person being pulled.
                                                               The wakeboarder or water-skier should
                                                               wear protective clothing. Severe internal in-
                                                               juries can occur if water is forced into body
                                                               cavities as a result of falling into the water
                                                               or while reboarding.  Normal swimwear
                                                               does not adequately protect against force-
                                                               ful water entry into the rectum or vagina.
                                                               The  person being pulled should wear  a
                                                               wetsuit bottom or clothing  that provides
                                                               equivalent protection. Such clothing in-
                                                               cludes thick, tightly woven, sturdy, and
                                                               snug-fitting apparel such  as denim,  but
                                                               does not include spandex or similar fab-
                                                               rics, like those used in bicycle shorts.

















                                                                                               19]]></page><page Index="28"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 20  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                            Safety information

                         A second person should be on board as a     Rules of the road
                          spotter to watch the wakeboarder or wa-  Your Yamaha boat is legally considered a
                          ter-skier; in most states, it is required by  powerboat. Operation of the boat must be
                          law. Let the person being pulled direct the  in accordance with the rules and regula-
                          operator’s control of speed and direction  tions governing the waterway on which it
                          with hand signals.  Be sure the seat is  is used.
                          locked in place (see page 98) before get-  Just as there are rules that apply when you
                          ting underway.                      are driving on streets and highways, there are
                         When preparing to pull a wakeboarder or  waterway rules that apply when you are oper-
                          water-skier, operate the boat at the slowest  ating your boat. These rules are used interna-
                          possible speed until the boat is well away  tionally, and are also enforced by the United
                          from the person being pulled and slack in  States Coast Guard and local agencies. You
                          the tow-rope is taken up. Make sure that  should be aware of these rules, and follow
                          the rope is not looped around anything.   them whenever you encounter another vessel
                          After checking that the wakeboarder or wa-  on the water.
                          ter-skier is ready and that there is no traffic  Several sets of rules prevail according to
                          or other obstacles, apply enough throttle to  geographic location, but are all basically the
                          raise the person.                   same as the International Rules of the Road.
                         Make smooth, wide turns. The boat is ca-  The rules presented here in this owner’s/op-
                          pable of very sharp turns, which could ex-  erator’s manual are condensed, and have
                          ceed the  abilities of the wakeboarder  or  been  provided for  your convenience only.
                          water-skier. Keep the person being towed  Consult your local U.S. Coast Guard Auxiliary
                          at least 50 m (164 ft), about twice the dis-  or Department of Motor Vehicles for a com-
                          tance of a standard tow-rope, away from  plete set of rules governing the waters in
                          any potential hazard.               which you will be operating your boat.
                         The operators of boats and other water-  Steering and sailing rules
                          craft may not be aware that you are pulling  Whenever two vessels on the water meet one
                          a wakeboarder or water-skier. Together  another, one vessel has the right-of-way; it is
                          with the  spotter, pay  attention to  others  called the “stand-on” vessel. The vessel that
                          around you and cruise at safe speeds.  does not have the right-of-way is called the
                         Be alert to the hazard of the tow-rope han-  “give-way” or “burdened” vessel. These rules
                          dle  snapping  back at the boat when the  determine which vessel has the right-of-way,
                          wakeboarder or water-skier falls or is un-  and what each vessel should do.
                          able to get up.                     Stand-on vessel
                        See pages 8 and 121 for wakeboard tower  The vessel with the right-of-way has the duty
                        use.                                  to continue its course and speed, except to
                                                              avoid an immediate  collision.  When you
                                                              maintain your direction and speed, the other
                                                              vessel will be able to determine how best to
                                                              avoid you.




                        20]]></page><page Index="29"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 21  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                        Give-way vessel                       In the following illustration, your boat is in the
                        The vessel which does not have the right-of-  center. You should give the right-of-way to
                        way has the duty to take positive and timely  any vessels shown in the white area (you are
                        action to stay out of the way of the stand-on  the give-way vessel). Any vessels in the shad-
                        vessel. Normally, you should not cross in  ed area must yield to you (they are the give-
                        front of the vessel with the right-of-way. You  way vessels). Both you and the meeting ves-
                        should slow down or change directions brief-  sel must alter course to avoid each other.
                        ly  and pass  behind the other vessel. You
                        should always move in such a way that the
                        operator of the other vessel can see what you
                        are doing.
                        The General Prudential  Rule regarding the
                        right-of-way is that if a collision appears un-
                        avoidable, neither boat has the right-of-way.
                        Both boats must avoid the collision.
                        In other words, follow the standard rules ex-
                        cept when a collision will occur unless both
                        vessels try to avoid each other. If that is the
                                                              Meeting
                        case, both vessels become give-way ves-
                                                              If you are meeting another power-driven ves-
                        sels.
                                                              sel head-on, and are close enough to run the
                        Rules when encountering vessels
                                                              risk of collision, neither of you has the right-
                        There are three main situations that you may
                                                              of-way. Both of you should alter course to
                        encounter with other vessels which  could
                                                              avoid an accident. You should keep the other
                        lead to a collision unless the Steering Rules
                                                              vessel on your port (left) side. This rule does
                        are followed:
                                                              not apply if both of you will clear one another
                        Meeting: you are approaching another vessel
                                                              if you continue on your set course and speed.
                        head-on.
                        Crossing: you  are traveling  across another
                        vessel’s path.
                        Overtaking: you are passing or being passed
                        by another vessel.















                                                                                               21]]></page><page Index="30"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 22  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                            Safety information

                        Crossing                              Other special situations
                        When two power-driven vessels are crossing  There are three other rules you  should be
                        each other’s path close enough to run the risk  aware of when operating your boat around
                        of collision, the vessel which has the other on  other vessels.
                        the starboard (right) side must keep out of the  Narrow channels and bends
                        way of the other. If the other vessel is on your  When navigating in narrow channels, you
                        starboard (right) side, you must keep out of  should keep to the right when it is safe and
                        its way; you are the give-way vessel. If the  practical to do so. If the operator of a power-
                        other vessel is on your port (left) side, remem-  driven vessel is preparing to go around a
                        ber that you should maintain course and di-  bend that may obstruct the view of other wa-
                        rection, provided the other vessel gives you  ter vessels, the operator should sound a pro-
                        the right-of-way, as it should.       longed  blast of four to six seconds  on  the
                                                              horn. If another vessel is around the bend, it
                                                              too should sound the horn. Even if no reply is
                                                              heard, however, the vessel should still pro-
                                                              ceed around the bend with caution.
                                                              Fishing vessel right-of-way
                                                              All vessels fishing with nets, lines, or trawls
                                                              are considered to be “fishing vessels” under
                                                              the International Rules. Vessels with trolling
                                                              lines are not considered fishing vessels. Fish-
                                                              ing vessels have the right-of-way regardless
                                                              of position. Fishing vessels cannot, however,
                        Overtaking                            impede the passage of other vessels in nar-
                        If you are passing another vessel, you are the
                                                              row channels.
                        give-way vessel. This means that the other
                                                              Sailing vessel right-of-way
                        vessel is expected to maintain its course and
                                                              Sailing vessels should normally be given the
                        speed. You must stay out of its way until you
                                                              right-of-way. The exceptions to this are:
                        are clear of it. Likewise, if another vessel is
                                                              (1) When the sailing vessel is overtaking the
                        passing you, you should maintain your speed
                                                                 power-driven  vessel, the power-driven
                        and direction so that the other  vessel can
                                                                 vessel has the right-of-way.
                        steer itself around you.
                                                              (2) Sailing vessels should keep clear of any
                                                                 fishing vessel.
                                                              (3) In a  narrow channel, a sailing vessel
                                                                 should not hamper the safe passage of a
                                                                 power-driven vessel that can navigate
                                                                 only in such a channel.
                                                              Reading buoys and other markers
                                                              The waters of the United States are marked
                                                              for safe navigation by the lateral system of
                                                              buoyage. Simply put, buoys and markers
                                                              have an arrangement of shapes, colors, num-


                        22]]></page><page Index="31"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 23  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                        bers, and lights to show which side  of the
                        buoy a boater should pass on when navigat-
                        ing in a particular direction. The markings on
                        these buoys are oriented from the perspec-
                        tive of being entered from seaward (the boat-
                        er is going towards the harbor). Red buoys
                        are passed on your starboard (right) side
                        when proceeding from open water into port,
                        and black buoys are to your port (left) side. An
                        easy  way to  remember  the meaning of the
                        colors  is the phrase “red right returning.”
                        When navigating out of the harbor, your posi-
                        tion with respect to the buoys should be re-
                        versed; red buoys should be  to port and
                        black buoys to starboard.
                        Many bodies of water used by boaters are
                        entirely within the boundaries of a particular
                        state. The Uniform State Waterway Marking
                        System has been devised for these waters.




































                                                                                               23]]></page><page Index="32"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 24  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                            Safety information

                        This system uses buoys and signs with distinctive shapes and colors to show regulatory or
                        advisory information. These markers are white with black letters and orange borders. They
                        signify speed zones, restricted areas, danger areas, and general information.





















































                        Remember, markings may vary by geographic location. Always consult local boating author-
                        ities before riding your boat in unfamiliar waters.




                        24]]></page><page Index="33"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 25  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                           To get more boating safety           Enjoy your boat responsibly
                                   information                You share the areas you enjoy when operat-
                        Be informed about boating safety. Additional  ing your boat with others and with nature. So
                        publications and information can be obtained  your enjoyment includes a responsibility  to
                        from many organizations,  including the fol-  treat these other people, and the lands, wa-
                        lowing.                               ters, and wildlife with respect and courtesy.
                        United States Coast Guard             Whenever and wherever you are boating,
                        Consumer Affairs Staff (G-BC)         think of yourself as the guest of those around
                        Office of Boating, Public, and Consumer Af-  you. Remember, for example, that the sound
                        fairs                                 of your boat may be music to you, but it could
                        US Coast Guard Headquarters           be just noise to others. And the exciting
                        Washington, D.C. 20593-0001           splash of your wake can make waves others
                        http://www.uscgboating.org            won’t enjoy. Avoid riding close to shoreline
                        Other sources                         homes and waterfowl nesting areas or other
                        You can find local rules by contacting the Na-  wildlife areas, and keep a respectful distance
                        tional Association of State Boating Law Ad-  from fishermen, other boats, swimmers, and
                        ministrators, or your local Power Squadron.  populated beaches. When travel in areas like
                        Boat Education and Training           these  is unavoidable, operate slowly and
                        The Online Boating Safety Course, available  obey all laws.
                        through the watercraft section of  the  Remember that pollution can be harmful to
                        yamaha-motor.com  website, is a free, 50-  the environment. Do not refuel or add oil
                        question learning course available to the  where a spill could cause damage to nature.
                        public. Upon successful completion of 80  Keep your surroundings pleasant for the peo-
                        percent or better, the user can request a cer-  ple  and wildlife that share the  waterways:
                        tificate of completion by mail or can down-  don’t litter!
                        load one immediately. The  Online  Boating  When you go boating responsibly, with  re-
                        Safety Course, provided by  the Boat/US  spect and courtesy for others, you help en-
                        Foundation, is approved by the National As-  sure  that our waterways stay open  for  the
                        sociation of State Boating Law Administra-  enjoyment of a variety of recreational oppor-
                        tors (NASBLA) and recognized by the United  tunities.
                        States Coast Guard. This course meets the
                        education requirement for those states that
                        recognize  non-proctored,  NASBLA-ap-
                        proved courses.
                          The Online Boating Safety Course:
                          http://www.boatus.org/









                                                                                               25]]></page><page Index="34"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 26  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Description

                                                     Boat glossary



                          TERM          DEFINITION
                          Bow           The front part of the boat.
                          Deck          The “floor” or upper structure which covers the hull.
                          Give-way      The vessel that must yield the right-of-way when two boats meet.
                          Gunwale       The meeting junction of the deck and hull; the upper edge around the
                                        boat. Pronounced “gunnel.”
                          Hatch         An opening in the deck that provides access below.
                          Helm          The steering console.
                          Hull          The basic part of the boat; the underside.
                          Lanyard       The cord or tether that connects the operator to the engine shut-off
                                        switch so the engines will stop if the operator accidentally leaves the
                                        helm.
                          PFD           A personal flotation device, also known as “life jacket.”
                          Planing       Traveling at a speed fast enough so the boat has leveled out and is
                                        skimming on top of the water. There is a wake.
                          Port          The left side of the boat.
                          Stand-on      The vessel with the right-of-way when two boats meet.
                          Starboard     The right side of the boat.
                          Stern         The back part of the boat.
                          Sub-planing   Traveling at a medium speed. The bow of the boat is out of the water,
                                        but you are still traveling through the water. There is a wake.
                          Transom       The vertical part of the stern.
                          Trolling      Traveling at idle speed, using little or no throttle. The boat is down in the
                                        water and it is not leaving a wake.
                          Wake          The visible track of disturbed water that the boat leaves behind as it
                                        moves in the water.














                        26]]></page><page Index="35"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 27  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                Description

                                            Location of main components
                        Exterior components
                                                                                   252S/252SE

                                                                                             3
                                                 2
                                         1





                                                                                     4
                                                                              5
                                                                        1


                                                      4
                                              6
                                         7
                                     8
                                9
                                               12
                                           11
                                       10
                                                                                             13

                                                                                         4



                                    16                                        14
                                                                          15
                                                                       4
                                         17                      11
                        1  Handrail                           10 Table bracket (page 119)
                        2  Windshield (page 112)              11 Flushing hose connector (page 170)
                        3  Swim platform shower (page 117)    12 Ski tow hook
                        4  Cleat                              13 Horn (page 149)
                        5  Fuel tank filler cap (page 132)    14 Bilge pump outlet (page 137)
                        6  Anchor storage compartment (page 103)  15 Cooling water pilot outlet (page 151)
                        7  Bow eye                            16 Swim platform (page 116)
                        8  Bow light (page 63, 89)            17 Reboarding grip
                        9  Bow ladder (page 115)


                                                                                               27]]></page><page Index="36"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 28  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Description





                           252SE/252SD
                                                                     3
                                                    2






                                          1













                           AR250/252S/252XE                   SX250
                                    5  6                           7          8




                           4












                        1  Wakeboard tower (page 121)
                        2  Bimini top (page 127)
                        3  Anchor light (page 113)
                        4  Wakeboard tower (page 121)
                        5  Bimini top (page 123)
                        6  Anchor light (page 113)
                        7  Anchor light (page 114)
                        8  Bimini top (page 128)



                        28]]></page><page Index="37"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 29  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                Description

                        Seats & interior components









                               1      2                    3         4         5       6

















                              11     10                      9          8     7        6









                        1  Front starboard seat (front) (page 98)
                        2  Front starboard seat (rear) (page 98, 104)
                        3  Driver’s seat (page 99)
                        4  Rear starboard seat (page 98, 105)
                        5  Starboard engine hood seat (page 98, 103)
                        6  Swim platform seat (252S / 252SE / 252SD)
                           (page 101)
                        7  Port engine hood seat (page 98, 103)
                        8  Rear port seat (page 98, 106)
                        9  Passenger’s seat (page 98, 101)
                        10 Front port seat (rear) (page 98, 104)
                        11 Front port seat (front) (page 98)







                                                                                               29]]></page><page Index="38"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 30  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Description



                                                                                  3
                                          1






                                                                4
                                          2                                                  6
                                                                          5

                                  7
                                                    8
                                                                        9

                                                                                   10

















                                                           11
                        1  Anchor storage compartment (page 103)
                        2  Front underseat storage compartment (page
                           104)
                        3  Stowable table (page 108)
                        4  USB charger (page 120)
                        5  Glove compartment (page 108)
                        6  Enclosed head compartment (page 106)
                        7  Stern storage compartment (page 110)
                        8  Wet storage compartment (page 110)
                        9  Driver’s side console compartment (page 107)
                        10 Ski locker (page 104)
                        11 Rear underseat storage compartment (page
                           105)


                        30]]></page><page Index="39"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 31  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                Description



                          Courtesy (Interior) light











                          Beverage holder










                          Speaker






                                                                        *1


                                                               *1 = 252S/252SE/252XE/252SD
























                                                                                               31]]></page><page Index="40"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 32  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Description

                        Stern components







                                                                  1






                              2                                                            2
                                     3                                             3
                                         4                                     4
                                                       5











                                6                            7                8         6


                        1  Stern ladder (page 116)
                        2  Stern eye
                        3  Shift gate (page 41)
                        4  Jet thrust nozzle
                        5  Articulating keel (page 43)
                        6  Intake grate
                        7  Hull drain plug (page 136)
                        8  Water temperature/water depth sensor















                        32]]></page><page Index="41"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 33  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                Description

                        Helm components
                        AR250 / SX250

                                1    2


                                                       4
                               HORN
                                     BILGE
                                                                       5


                                  3                                             6




                                                                                   7      8



                                                                                  5V









                                                       12
                                                                            10
                                                                                            9
                                                                           11
                           13


                        1  “HORN” switch (page 46)            11 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 37)
                        2  “BILGE” switch (page 46)           12 Steering wheel (page 43)
                        3  Main switch (page 39)              13 Tilt lever (page 44)
                        4  Multi-function display unit (page 46)
                        5  Phone holder
                        6  Controller (page 48)
                        7  USB charger (page 120)
                        8  Aux input (page 62)
                        9  Remote control lever (page 40)
                        10 Engine shut-off switch (page 37)


                                                                                               33]]></page><page Index="42"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 34  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Description

                        252S






                                                       2
                                                                       3



                                  1                                             4
                                                                                   5
                                                                                       6
                                                                                         7
                                                                                        8
                                                                             10
                                                                                  9








                                                            14       15
                                                       16
                                                                            12
                                                             5V
                                                                                            11
                                                                            13
                           17


                        1  Main switch (page 39)              12 Engine shut-off switch (page 37)
                        2  Multi-function display unit (page 72)  13 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 37)
                        3  Phone holder                       14 USB charger (page 120)
                        4  Controller (page 73)               15 Aux input (page 88)
                        5  “HORN” switch (page 71)            16 Steering wheel (page 43)
                        6  “BILGE” switch (page 71)           17 Tilt lever (page 44)
                        7  “BLOWER” switch (page 71)
                        8  “ACC”2 switch (page 71)
                        9  “ACC”1 switch (page 71)
                        10 “NAV LIGHTS” switch (page 71)
                        11 Remote control lever (page 40)


                        34]]></page><page Index="43"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 35  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                Description

                        252SE / 252XE / 252SD





                                               2       3
                                                                       4
                                  1


                                                                                5
                                                                                   6
                                                                                       7
                                                                                         8
                                                                                        9

                                                                             11
                                                                                   10





                                               18
                           19
                                                  16       17                13

                                                                             14          12
                                                   5V
                                                                             15

                        1  “START/STOP” button (page 39)      11 “NAV LIGHTS” switch (252SE / 252SD) (page
                        2  Multi-function display unit (page 72)  71)
                        3  Throttle/shift paddle (252SD)      12 Remote control lever (page 40)
                        4  Phone holder                       13 Main switch (page 39)
                        5  Controller (page 73)               14 Engine shut-off switch (page 37)
                        6  “HORN” switch (252SE / 252SD) (page 71)  15 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 37)
                        7  “BILGE” switch (252SE / 252SD) (page 71)  16 USB charger (page 120)
                        8  “BLOWER” switch (252SE / 252SD) (page 71)  17 Aux input (page 88)
                        9  “ACC”2 switch (252SE / 252SD) (page 71)  18 Steering wheel (page 43)
                        10 “ACC”1 switch (252SE / 252SD) (page 71)  19 Tilt lever (page 44)




                                                                                               35]]></page><page Index="44"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 36  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Description

                        Engine components




                                            2                         1        2







                            1
                                                                                           3
                            3













                                                        5
                                                                   6    7         4
                               4









                        1  Blower (page 147)
                        2  Fuse box (cover) (page 194)
                        3  Engine oil filler cap (page 134)
                        4  Engine cover (page 177)
                        5  Spark plug/Ignition coil
                        6  Dipstick (page 134)
                        7  Air filter case







                        36]]></page><page Index="45"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 37  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                         Control function operation

                             Boat control functions           AR250 / SX250 / 252S
                        Engine shut-off switch
                             WARNING
                         Always attach the engine shut-off cord                       1
                          (lanyard) to your PFD before starting the
                          engines. Failure to attach the cord could
                          result in a runaway boat if the operator is           2
                          ejected.
                         Do not attach the cord to clothing that           3
                          could tear loose. Do not route the cord
                          in such a way that it could become en-  1  Engine shut-off switch
                          tangled, preventing it from functioning.   2  Clip
                         Avoid accidentally pulling the cord dur-  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          ing normal operation. Once the engines
                                                              252SE / 252XE / 252SD
                          have stopped, you have no steering con-
                          trol of the boat which could result in an
                          accident. Also, without  engine power,
                          the boat could slow rapidly from planing                       1
                          speed. This could cause people and ob-
                          jects in the boat to be thrown forward,
                          which could cause injury.                                      2
                        The clip  on the  end of  the engine  shut-off
                        cord (lanyard) must be attached to the engine                    3
                        shut-off switch  for the  engines to run. The
                        cord must be attached to a secure place on  1  Engine shut-off switch
                        the operator’s PFD. Should the operator fall  2  Clip
                        overboard or leave the helm, the cord will pull  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                        out the clip, stopping the ignition to the both
                        engines. This will prevent the boat from run-  Batteries and battery switches
                        ning away under power.                The batteries are located in the engine com-
                                                              partment.
                                                              This boat uses two marine batteries. One bat-
                                                              tery is designated as the start battery. The
                                                              start battery is connected to the starter cir-
                                                              cuits on both engines to provide current for
                                                              the starter motors.
                                                              The other battery is designated as the house
                                                              battery. The house battery provides power
                                                              for the various accessory circuits on the boat,




                                                                                               37]]></page><page Index="46"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 38  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Control function operation

                        such as the circuits for lighting, bilge pump,
                        blowers and audio system.                      1           2
                                      2
                               1








                                                              1  ON position (green)
                                                              2  OFF position (red)
                        1  Start battery
                        2  House battery                      In normal operation, keep the “START” and
                                                              “HOUSE” switches in the ON position. Keep
                        The battery switch assembly is located in the  the “EMERG PARALLEL” switch in the OFF
                        rear underseat storage compartment (port).  position. This setting allows both batteries to
                        There are three switches  on  the  battery  be charged automatically while the engines
                        switch assembly: the  “START”  switch,  are running.  NOTICE: Do  not turn the
                        “HOUSE” switch, and “EMERG PARALLEL”  “HOUSE” switch to the OFF position if the
                        switch.                               boat is moored in the water as it will pre-
                                                              vent the anchor light from functioning.
                                                              If  the start  battery is discharged, turn  the
                                        2                 3   “EMERG PARALLEL” switch to the ON posi-
                                                              tion to start the engines. Once the engines
                                                              are started  or the start battery is charged,
                              1                          4    turn the “EMERG PARALLEL” switch to the
                                                              OFF position.




                        1  Battery switch assembly
                        2  “HOUSE” switch (red)
                        3  “EMERG PARALLEL” switch (yellow)
                        4  “START” switch (red)











                        38]]></page><page Index="47"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 39  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                         Control function operation

                        Main switches                         Main switch (252SE / 252XE / 252SD)
                        (AR250 / SX250 / 252S)                The main switch controls the ignition circuit
                        There is a main switch for each engine.  as follows:
                        The main  switch controls  the ignition  and
                        electrical circuits as follows:                       ON
                                                                      OFF
                               OFF      START
                                     ON

                                                                                         1
                                      HORN
                                             BILGE


                                  1            2
                                                              1  Main switch

                        1  Main switch (port engine)          OFF:
                        2  Main switch (starboard engine)     Ignition circuit is  switched off.  The engines
                                                              cannot be started. (The main switch key can
                        OFF:                                  be removed.)
                        Ignition circuit is switched off.  The engine  ON:
                        cannot be started, but other switches will op-  Ignition  circuit is  switched on. (The main
                        erate. (The main switch key can be removed.)  switch key cannot be removed.)
                        ON:
                        Ignition circuit is switched on. (The main  “START/STOP” buttons
                        switch key cannot be removed.)        (252SE / 252XE / 252SD)
                        START:                                The engines can  be  started or stopped by
                        The starter motor will turn to start the engine.  pushing the “START/STOP” buttons. It is
                        (When the main switch key is released, it re-  possible to start or stop the engines individu-
                        turns automatically to “ON”.)         ally.
                        TIP:                                   PORT: Port engine
                         The engine will not start when the clip is re-   STBD: Starboard engine
                          moved from the engine shut-off switch.
                          The starter motor will turn over without the
                          cord attached.
                         The main switch will not operate (the starter
                          motor  will not turn over) if the “START”
                          switch in the rear underseat storage com-
                          partment (port) is turned to the OFF posi-
                          tion. (See page 37 for more information.)





                                                                                               39]]></page><page Index="48"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 40  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Control function operation

                                                              ward position,  and then as the  levers are
                                                              moved farther, accelerates  the  engines for
                                                              more thrust. Moving the levers back from the
                                                              neutral position shifts into the reverse posi-
                                                              tion, and then as the levers are moved farther,
                                                              accelerates the engines for more thrust.
                                                              AR250 / SX250 / 252S: For cruising, adjust
                                                              the remote control levers so both engines are
                                                              running at the same engine speed.
                                         1                    TIP:

                        1  “START/STOP” button                Because of the mechanical throttle linkage,
                                                              the remote control levers may not be exactly
                        TIP:                                  even with one another when the engines are
                         The engine will not start when the clip is re-  running at the same engine speed.
                          moved from the engine shut-off switch.
                         The main switch will not operate (the starter
                                                                              N
                          motor  will not turn over) if the “START”    2       1
                                                                    F      5        5    R
                          switch in the rear underseat storage com-  3                  4
                          partment (port) is turned to the OFF posi-
                          tion. (See page 37 for more information.)  7                      7
                                                                            6     6
                        Remote control levers                  8                              8
                             WARNING
                         Before shifting, make sure there are no
                          swimmers  or obstacles in the water
                                                              1  Neutral position
                          near you.                           2  TDE position
                         When operating in reverse, go slowly.  3  Forward position
                          Do not open the throttle more than half.  4  Reverse position
                          Otherwise, the boat may become unsta-  5  Shift
                          ble, which could result in loss of control  6  Fully closed
                          and an accident.                    7  Throttle
                         Do not shift into reverse while traveling  8  Fully open
                          at planing speeds. Loss of control, boat
                                                              TIP:
                          swamping, or damage to the boat could
                                                              This boat is equipped with a “start-in-gear”
                          occur.
                                                              protection. The engines will not start unless
                        The remote control lever for each engine con-  the levers are in the neutral position.
                        trols both throttle and shifting. In normal op-
                        eration, the levers are moved together.  This boat uses a direct-drive propulsion sys-
                        Moving the  remote control levers  forward  tem. Therefore, jet thrust is always being pro-
                        from the neutral position shifts into the for-  duced while the engines  are  running. The


                        40]]></page><page Index="49"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 41  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                         Control function operation

                        direction of the boat is controlled by the shift
                        gates, which direct the flow of the jet thrust as     N
                        follows:                                    F   1                R

                        Neutral
                        The shift gates are dropped down part way
                        over the jet thrust nozzles. The neutral posi-
                        tion balances forward and reverse thrust to
                        help keep the  boat  from moving, although
                        some movement may occur.
                                                              1  TDE position

                          1

                                                                1
                          2

                                                                2



                        1  Shift gate
                        2  Jet thrust nozzle
                                                              1  Shift gate
                        Forward
                                                              2  Jet thrust nozzle
                        When the remote control levers are initially
                        moved to the forward position and the boat is  When the remote control levers are moved
                        operating at a slow speed, the shift gates are  farther forward, the shift gates are lifted all the
                        lifted up slightly from the neutral position and  way up.  All  jet thrust is  to the rear, which
                        jet thrust is directed downward at an angle.  moves the boat forward.
                        This function, which is called the thrust direc-
                        tional enhancer (TDE), helps to provide good
                        handling response when the steering wheel is
                        turned, even though there is less thrust avail-
                        able at low engine speeds.













                                                                                               41]]></page><page Index="50"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 42  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Control function operation

                                                               turn to the neutral position and the engines
                          1                                    will return to idle speed.



                                                                                    1
                          2
                                                                    2




                        1  Shift gate
                        2  Jet thrust nozzle
                                                              1  Throttle/shift paddle (right)
                        Throttle/shift paddles (252SD)        2  Throttle/shift paddle (left)
                        When the DRiVE mode is activated, the throt-
                        tle/shift paddles can be used at low speeds  TIP:
                        to control the throttle and shifting instead of   If the operator pulls both throttle/shift pad-
                        the remote control levers. When making  dles until they stop, the reverse operation
                        small throttle  adjustments for  docking, the  has priority.
                        operator can use the throttle/shift paddles to   When the DRiVE mode is activated, the en-
                        operate the boat smoothly forward and in re-  gine speed for forward operation is limited
                        verse while keeping both hands on the steer-  to approximately 3000 rpm and the engine
                        ing wheel. (See page 79 for information on  speed for reverse operation is limited to ap-
                        the DRiVE mode.)                       proximately 3500 rpm.
                         When the operator  pulls  the throttle/shift   If either throttle/shift paddle is pulled while
                          paddle (right), the shift gates for both en-  starting the  engines, the  engines will not
                          gines will move to the TDE position, the en-  start.
                          gine speed will increase, and the boat will
                          move forward at a slow speed. When the  Reverse
                          operator releases the throttle/shift paddle  The shift gates are dropped all the way down
                          (right), the shift gates will return to the neu-  over the jet thrust nozzles. Jet thrust is redi-
                          tral position and the engines will return to  rected  toward  the bow of the  boat, which
                          idle speed.                         moves the boat backward.
                         When the operator  pulls  the throttle/shift
                          paddle  (left), the shift  gates for  both en-
                          gines will move to the reverse position, the
                          engine speed will increase, and the boat
                          will start moving in reverse at a slow speed.
                          When the operator releases  the throt-
                          tle/shift paddle (left), the shift gates will re-




                        42]]></page><page Index="51"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 43  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                         Control function operation




                                                                               1
                          1
                                                                         1     2
                                                                             2







                        1  Shift gate                         1  Running mode and single lever mode
                                                              2  DRiVE mode (252SD)
                        Steering
                        Your boat can be steered by turning the
                        steering wheel the same direction you wish to
                        travel, to the right or left. When the steering
                        wheel is turned, the angle  of the jet thrust
                        nozzles at the rear of the craft is changed,
                        and the change in direction of the jet thrust
                        nozzles changes the direction of the boat ac-
                        cordingly. In addition, the direction of the ar-                 1
                        ticulating keel changes according to the   1                2
                        movement of the jet thrust nozzles.
                        252SD: When the operator is using the throt-  1  Jet thrust nozzle
                        tle/shift paddles (DRiVE  mode), the  turning  2  Articulating keel
                        range of the steering wheel is approximately
                        half the range of when the operator is using  Since the strength of the jet thrust determines
                        the remote control levers (running mode or  the speed and direction of a turn, the throttle
                        single lever mode).  Although the turning  must always be opened above idle when at-
                        range of the steering wheel changes depend-  tempting a turn, except at trolling speed.
                        ing on the operation mode, the movement of  Because boats steer from the stern, the stern
                        the jet thrust nozzles is adjusted automatical-  of the boat swings out in the opposite direc-
                        ly so that the full range of motion for the noz-  tion of your turn. If you turn to starboard, for
                        zles matches the turning range regardless of  example, the stern of the boat will swing to
                        the selected mode. (See page 79 for informa-  the left. Keep this in mind when navigating
                        tion on each operation mode.)         near a person in the water, such as a down
                                                              wakeboarder or water-skier, or an obstacle,
                                                              such as a dock.







                                                                                               43]]></page><page Index="52"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 44  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Control function operation

                        Tilt lever
                             WARNING

                         Never touch the tilt lever during opera-
                          tion, otherwise the steering wheel could
                          suddenly change  position, which may
                          lead to an accident.
                         Be sure the steering wheel is locked in
                          position after adjustment. If the steering
                          wheel is not locked in position, it may
                          suddenly change position during opera-
                          tion, which may lead to an accident.
                        The tilt lever is located  under the steering
                        wheel and is used to adjust the tilt of the
                        steering wheel. There are 5 positions.











                                          1


                        1  Tilt lever

                        To adjust the tilt:
                        (1) Push the lever down, and then move the
                            steering wheel up or down to the desired
                            position.
                        (2) The lever will lock into place when the
                            steering wheel is moved into one of the 5
                            available positions.
                        (3) Make sure that the tilt lever returns to its
                            original  position and that  the steering
                            wheel is securely locked in place.








                        44]]></page><page Index="53"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 45  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                           Helm controls (AR250 / SX250)



                               1     2


                                                       3
                               HORN
                                    BILGE
                                                                       4

                                                                                5




                                                                                  6       7



                                                                                  5V







                        1  “HORN” switch
                        2  “BILGE” switch
                        3  Multi-function display unit
                        4  Phone holder
                        5  Controller
                        6  USB charger
                        7  Aux input



















                                                                                               45]]></page><page Index="54"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 46  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Switch panel                             Multi-function display unit
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-   operation
                        play directly, you can use the switches to op-
                                                              Because the multi-function display unit is
                        erate various functions.
                                                              equipped with a touch screen, you can touch
                                     1      2                 the display directly to operate the display
                                                              functions.
                                                              In addition to touching the display, you can
                                                              use the joystick to operate the display func-
                                     HORN
                                            BILGE
                                                              tions.
                                                              Touching the multi-function display




                        1  “HORN” switch                                 NW   N   NE
                                                                 FUEL                   DEPTH
                        2  “BILGE” switch                        50  %     FLOAT MODE   0  Ft
                                                                                °F
                        “HORN” switch                                      Water Temp
                        Activates the horn. The horn can be used to  START  V          HOUSE  V
                                                                                       11.8
                                                                   11.8
                        signal other boats as required by the “Rules  Bilge  Blower  Nav  Anchor
                        of the road”. (See page 20.)
                        The switch light comes on while the horn is
                        operating.
                                                              Using the joystick
                        “BILGE” switch                        This joystick has the following two operation
                        Turns the bilge pump on or off. (See page  modes.
                        137.)                                  Volume control mode
                        The switch light comes on while the bilge   Navigation control mode
                        pump is operating.                    Push the  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button to
                        TIP:                                  switch the operation mode.
                        Even if the bilge pump is turned off, the pump
                                                                               1
                        will operate every 2 minutes when the house
                        battery switch is in the on position.
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL



                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE  NO WAKE


                                                              1  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button


                        46]]></page><page Index="55"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 47  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Volume control mode
                        Turn the joystick knob to change the audio
                        volume.
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                 1
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Although the procedures in this manual ex-
                        1  Joystick knob                      plain how to make selections by touching the
                                                              display, you can also make selections using
                        Navigation control mode               the joystick knob.
                        (1) Turn the joystick knob to change the se-
                            lected setting or item.



                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                 1


                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE

                        1  Joystick knob
                        (2) Push the joystick knob to select an item
                            or confirm a setting.
















                                                                                               47]]></page><page Index="56"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 48  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                Operation buttons             Operating the boat at a steady speed
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-  (cruise assist)
                        play directly, you can use the operation but-  The cruise assist feature is for steady engine
                        tons and the controller to operate  various  speed operation when the boat is traveling
                        functions.                            above no-wake speeds. The cruise assist is
                                                              available for use whenever the engines are
                        Controller                            running above 3000 rpm and  below  7000
                                                              rpm.
                                      1  2 3                  To activate the cruise assist:
                                                              (1) Push the remote control levers forward
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)                to open the throttle until the desired en-
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                                 gine speed is reached and both engines
                                                                 are operating at the same engine speed.
                                                              (2) Push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                                                                 or “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button. When
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                                 the cruise  assist is activated, “Cruise”
                                       4   5                     and the cruise assist setting level will be
                                                                 displayed under the boat speed.
                                Name           Function
                         1  “HOME” button  Displays the home           SE      S      SW
                                          screen. (See page 80.)
                         2  “VOLUME  –    Switches the joystick
                            (SCROLL)” but-  between the volume
                            ton           control mode and the
                                          navigation control
                                          mode. When the main
                                          switches are turned to              MPH
                                          the on position, the               Cruise +4
                                          volume control mode
                                          is selected by default.
                                                                                 1
                         3  “CANCEL” but-  Deselects the current-
                            ton           ly selected item.
                                                              1  Cruise assist setting level
                         4  “CRUISE/NO    Activate and set the
                            WAKE” (–) but-  cruise assist, no-wake
                            ton           mode, and reverse    Once the cruise assist is activated, the set
                         5  “CRUISE/NO    RPM control. (See the   engine speed can be increased by pushing
                            WAKE” (+) but-  following sections.)  the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button or de-
                            ton                                creased by  pushing the  “CRUISE/NO
                                                               WAKE” (–)  button. However, the  adjust-
                                                               ment is limited to a maximum of 8 incre-
                                                               ments above or below the initial cruise
                                                               assist setting. Each time a button is
                                                               pushed, the engine speed will increase or
                                                               decrease approximately 100–200 rpm.




                        48]]></page><page Index="57"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 49  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                         While the cruise assist is activated, the en-  The no-wake mode can be set to 3 engine
                          gine speed can also be adjusted by operat-  speeds. To adjust the engine speed while the
                          ing the remote control levers.      no-wake  mode is activated, push the
                                                              “CRUISE/NO   WAKE”   (+)  button  or
                        To deactivate the cruise assist:      “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button.
                        Operate the remote control  levers  to de-  To deactivate the no-wake mode:
                        crease the engine speed to 3000 rpm or less.  Perform one of the following operations.
                        When “Cruise” and the cruise assist setting   Push  the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button
                        level disappear, the cruise assist is deactivat-  repeatedly until “No Wake” disappears.
                        ed.                                    Push the remote control levers forward to
                                                               open the throttle.
                        Operating the boat with a minimal
                        wake (no-wake mode)                   Operating the boat in reverse with
                        The no-wake mode is useful for operating the  more thrust (reverse RPM control)
                        boat at a steady speed with a minimal wake.  Engine speed in reverse is limited to approx-
                        This is especially convenient when traveling  imately 4500 rpm. If more thrust is required
                        in harbors, channels, or other areas posted  when the boat is traveling in reverse, use the
                        with low speed limits as “no wake zones”.  reverse RPM control.  WARNING! Be  pre-
                        The no-wake mode can be used only when  pared to  reduce throttle as  soon as the
                        the engines are operating at idle speed.  boat moves as desired.  Otherwise, the
                        To activate the no-wake mode:         boat may become unstable, which could
                        (1) Put the remote control levers in the TDE  result in loss of control and an accident.
                            position or forward position so that both  To activate the reverse RPM control:
                            engines are operating at idle speed.  (1) Move the remote control levers  back-
                        (2) Push the  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) but-  ward so that the throttle is opened in re-
                            ton. When the no-wake mode is activat-  verse and both engines are operating at
                            ed, “No Wake” will be displayed under  the same engine speed.
                            the boat speed.                   (2) Increase the engine speed to 4500 rpm,
                                                                 and then push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE”
                                  SE      S      SW
                                                                 (+) button.
                                                              Once the reverse RPM control is activated,
                                                              pushing the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                                                              will increase the  available  engine speed by
                                                              approximately 500 rpm in 3 stages up to a
                                         MPH                  maximum of 6000 rpm, and pushing the
                                       No Wake                “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button will decrease
                                                              the available engine speed. However, the ad-
                                         1                    justment is limited to these 3 increments.
                        1  “No Wake”





                                                                                               49]]></page><page Index="58"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 50  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        To deactivate the reverse RPM control:
                        Operate the remote control  levers  to de-
                        crease the engine speed to less than 4500
                        rpm.


























































                        50]]></page><page Index="59"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 51  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                           Multi-function display elements




                                              1             2             1




                                                     NW      N      NE
                                         FUEL                                 DEPTH
                                        50  %           FLOAT MODE            0  Ft

                                                                 °F
                                                         Water Temp
                                           START                            HOUSE
                                           11.8  V                          11.8  V
                                           Bilge  Blower              Nav  Anchor

                                                            4    3



                        1  Static bar                         3  Center display
                        2  Screen tab bar                     4  Status indicator bar






























                                                                                               51]]></page><page Index="60"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 52  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Static bar





                                                        NW       NE
                                        FUEL                                  DEPTH
                                 1                                                     4
                                        50  %                                 0  Ft
                                 2                                                     5




                                 3                                                     6
                                            START                          HOUSE
                                            11.8  V                        11.8  V
                                           Bilge  Blower            Nav   Anchor



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Fuel level bar graph  Displays the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Depending
                                                 on the amount of remaining fuel, the bar graph is displayed in 3
                                                 colors: blue, orange, and red.
                          2  Port engine tachometer  Displays the engine speed.
                          3  Start battery voltage val-  Displays the start battery voltage in a numerical format.
                             ue
                          4  Depth level         Displays the water depth in feet or meters. Depending on the wa-
                                                 ter depth, the bar graph is displayed in 3 colors: blue, orange, and
                                                 red.
                          5  Starboard engine ta-  Displays the engine speed.
                             chometer
                          6  House battery voltage   Displays the house battery voltage in a numerical format.
                             value


















                        52]]></page><page Index="61"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 53  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Center display


                                                  NW         N        NE

                                                       FLOAT MODE


                                                                   °F
                                                        Water Temp
                                                                            1



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Center display      Displays various information for each screen tab.

                        Screen tab bar
                                     1      2     3     4      5      6     7      8








                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Clock               Displays the time. Tap the clock to set the time. (See page 63.)
                          2  Home screen tab     Displays the home screen. (See page 55.)
                          3  Map screen tab      Displays the map screen. (See page 55.)
                          4  Trip screen tab     Displays the trip screen. (See page 59.)
                          5  Media screen tab    Displays the media screen. (See page 60.)
                          6  System control screen   Displays the system control screen. (See page 63.)
                             tab
                          7  Setting screen tab  Displays the setting screen. (See page 63.)
                          8  Warning mute button  Mutes the sound of the buzzer for a specific time depending on
                                                 the warnings present.













                                                                                               53]]></page><page Index="62"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 54  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Status indicator bar


                                      1       2             3             4       5

                                     Bilge  Blower                       Nav    Anchor



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Bilge pump indicator  Indicates the operation setting of the bilge pump. When the bilge
                                                 pump is turned off, the indicator will be gray, and when the bilge
                                                 pump is turned on, the indicator will be blue.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to change the bilge pump setting.
                          2  Blower indicator    Displays the operating status of the blowers. When the main
                                                 switches are turned to the on position, a 5-minute timer will be
                                                 displayed in this indicator while the blowers operate automatically.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the blowers on or off.
                          3  Warning icon bar    Displays the warning icons.
                                                 When a warning icon is displayed, tap the icon to display the
                                                 warning message for that icon.
                          4  Navigation light indicator  Displays the operating status of the navigation light mode. (When
                                                 the navigation light mode is activated, the bow light and anchor
                                                 light are turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the navigation light mode on
                                                 or off.
                          5  Anchor light indicator  Displays the operating status of the anchor light mode. (When the
                                                 anchor light mode is activated, only the anchor light is turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the anchor light mode on or
                                                 off.


























                        54]]></page><page Index="63"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 55  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                  Home screen                            Map screen
                        This screen displays the boat speed, current  This screen displays a map.
                        heading of the boat, and other information.

                         1        NW      N       NE

                                    RUNNING MODE

                         2
                                        MPH
                                                                                 MPH
                                                                                         REC
                         3
                                                                   Item            Function
                                Name           Function                      Shows the direction of
                         1  Heading       Displays the heading               North at the top of the
                                          of the boat.                       screen, or the current
                                                                             course being traveled at
                         2  Boat speed*   Displays the boat                  the top of the screen.
                                          speed in miles per
                                          hour or kilometers per
                                          hour.                              Zooms out to display a
                         3  Cruise  as-   Displays the operating             more distant view of the
                            sist/no-wake   status of the cruise as-          map.
                            mode status in-  sist and no-wake                Zooms in to display a clos-
                            dicator       mode.                              er view of the map.
                                          When the cruise assist
                                          is activated, “Cruise”
                                          and the cruise assist              Displays the Map Settings.
                                          setting level will be dis-
                                          played.
                                          When the no-wake
                                          mode is activated, “No             Records and Stops record-
                                          Wake” will be dis-         REC     ing a Track.
                                          played.
                                                                             Adds a waypoint.
                        * When both engines are not running, the wa-
                          ter temperature will be displayed.















                                                                                               55]]></page><page Index="64"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 56  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Waypoint
                        Set a waypoint for a destination on the map.     Waypoint Manager
                        Waypoints can be attached to any location.
                                                                       GR8            EDIT
                        The “Add Waypoint” screen  is  displayed
                        when a waypoint is attached.
                                                                      Lat:         26.9484
                                                                      Lon:         -80.0968
                                    Waypoint Manager
                                                                      Distance:    204.39  m
                             GR8
                                                                 Close   Delete   View     GoTo

                                                                   Item            Function
                                                                            Changes the color of the
                                                                            waypoint.
                           Close                   Add Waypoit  View        Views the waypoint on the
                                                                            map.
                                                              GoTo          Provides the distance to the
                                                                            waypoint, along with the
                        To add a Waypoint:                                  latitude and longitude. It
                        (1) Display the location you want to attach a       also tells when you have ar-
                            waypoint to on the map.                         rived at the waypoint and
                                                                            asks if you would like to
                        (2) Tap “   ”.                                      stop the navigation.
                        (3) Switch  to the “Add Waypoint”  screen,  Delete  Deletes the waypoint.
                            and select any letters.           EDIT          Changes the name of the
                                                                            waypoint.


                                                              Cruising to the destination:
                                                              (1) Select the waypoint created on the map.
                                                              (2) Tap “GOTO”.
                                     1
                                            2
                                                                      BAY
                              NEXT WAYPOINT 1.7 km
                                   29°
                                                                      Distance:  12.06
                                            MPH
                                                                      Lat: 45.28001
                                                    REC
                                                                      Lon: -92.97718
                        (4) Tap “Save”.
                        When the waypoint is set, “Waypoint Manag-
                        er” is displayed, and the latitude and longi-
                                                                        Delete     Edit
                        tude of the set waypoint are displayed along
                        with the distance from the current location.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              To stop tracking, tap “STOP”.



                        56]]></page><page Index="65"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 57  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Map settings screen                        Item            Function
                        Perform settings for  waypoints  and tracks,  Save  When the recording stops,
                        etc. on the Map Settings screen.                    a Save Track prompt will
                                                                            appear. Choosing Save will
                                                                            display the Add Track
                        Waypoints                                           screen shown below. Spin
                        Perform waypoint management. Tap “Way-              the dials to choose a three-
                        points” to display “Waypoint Manager”.              letter name and touch Save
                                                                            when complete.

                                      Map Settings            To change a track name:
                              Waypoints                       (1) Tap Track Name.
                                                              (2) Select any letters on  the  “Add  Track”
                              Tracks
                                                                 screen.
                              Satellite Status
                              Depth / Position
                                                                             Add Track
                             Close
                                                                               A    B
                                                                          A    B    C
                        Tracks                                            B    C    D
                        Perform track management. Tap “Tracks” to
                        display “Track Manager”.
                                                                 Cancel                    Save

                                      Track Manager           (3) Tap “Save”.
                              DOK
                                                              Tap “   ” to display the track management
                              <Current>
                                                              screen.

                                                                          Track Manager
                             Close                Record Track
                                                                        <Current>     EDIT
                                                                       Distance:    0.00  ft
                             Item            Function
                         Record Track /   Records the current path
                         Stop Recording  (track) being driven, or halts
                                       the recording of the track.
                                                                 Close            Show

                                                                   Item            Function
                                                                            Changes the color of the
                                                                            track.



                                                                                               57]]></page><page Index="66"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 58  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation


                             Item            Function         Chart Setup
                         EDIT          Changes the name of, or   Perform settings for functions displayed on
                                       deletes, the track.    the map.
                         Show / Hide   Shows the track on the
                                       map. Hide will make that
                                       track invisible.                     Chart Setup
                         Close         Returns to the Track Man-
                                       ager screen.                  SHOW GRIDS    SHOW  TRACKS
                                                                     SHOW TEXT     SHOW NAV AIDS
                        Satellite status
                        Display detectable satellites.               SHOW WAYPOINTS  SHOW WAYPOINT NAMES

                                                                 Close
                               Satellite Status  N
                            SATELLITES     3
                            9:47
                            Latitude:  35.6060
                            Longitude:  -84.2541
                            Op Mode:  0.00  W         E       To perform settings, select the item you want
                            HDOP:  0.00
                            VDOP:  0.00                       to display.
                            TDOP:  0.00
                            SOG:  0.0
                            COG:  0
                                               S
                            Close

                        Depth / Position
                        Perform  settings  for contour lines and  safe
                        depths.


                                      Depth / Position
                            DEPTH CONTOUR
                              All  66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                            SAFETY CONTOUR
                              66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft

                            Close



                        To perform settings, select the desired depth.
                        Set depths are reflected on the map.






                        58]]></page><page Index="67"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 59  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                   Trip screen                    Name             Function
                        This screen displays the hours of engine op-  Water   Shows the ambient water
                        eration, fuel consumption, and other informa-  Temperature*  temperature in degrees
                                                                            Fahrenheit or degrees Cel-
                        tion.                                               sius.
                                                              Average Speed  Shows the average boat
                                        1            2 3                    speed in miles per hour or
                                 NW       N       NE                        kilometers per hour.
                                Economy :    0.0 MPG          Highest Speed  Shows the highest speed of
                                                                            the boat in miles per hour or
                              Trip Distance:  0.0 Mi                        kilometers per hour.
                                                              Port Engine   Shows the total number of
                                Fuel Used :  0.0 Gal          Hours*        hours that the port engine
                                                                            has been running since the
                                Fuel Flow :  0.0 GPH
                                                                            boat was new.
                                                              Starboard     Shows the total number of
                                                    Reset All
                                                              Engine Hours*  hours that the starboard en-
                                                                            gine has been running since
                        1  Menu                                             the boat was new.
                        2  Scrollbar
                                                              * This item cannot be reset.
                        3  “Reset All” button
                        The menu displays the following items. Scroll  To reset an item on the trip screen:
                        through the menu items using the scrollbar.  Touch and hold the “  ” of the item that
                                                              you want to reset for several seconds.
                             Name            Function
                         Economy       Shows the average dis-
                                       tance that can be traveled   To reset all of the display items:
                                       on 1.0 gallon or 1.0 liter of   Touch the “Reset All” button to reset all of the
                                       fuel. When gallons are se-
                                       lected for the display units,   items.
                                       the value is shown in miles
                                       and when liters are selected
                                       for the display units, the
                                       value is shown in kilome-
                                       ters.
                         Trip Distance  Shows the distance trav-
                                       eled by the boat in miles or
                                       kilometers since the item
                                       was last reset.
                         Fuel Used     Shows the total fuel that
                                       has been consumed by the
                                       port and starboard engines
                                       in gallons or liters.
                         Fuel Flow*    Shows the total fuel con-
                                       sumption of the port and
                                       starboard engines in gal-
                                       lons per hour or liters per
                                       hour.




                                                                                               59]]></page><page Index="68"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 60  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Media screen                currently connected device, and  then  con-
                        This screen can be used to receive a radio  nect the other device.
                        broadcast, connect to an external device us-
                        ing Bluetooth wireless technology, and per-  To change the volume:
                        form other functions.                 The following slider is displayed in each
                                                              screen.
                                                              Use the slider control to change the volume.
                                        Source
                                                                               1
                                  AM Radio    FM Radio
                                  Weather     Bluetooth
                                        Auxiliary             1  Slider control

                                                              TIP:
                           Turn Off   Select a Source  Zone Control
                                                              The volume can also be adjusted by tapping
                                                              the “  ” or “  ” button.
                              Item            Function
                         AM Radio      Switches the source to the
                                       AM radio tuner and dis-  Radio screen (AM/FM)
                                       plays the AM radio screen.  You can receive a radio broadcast.
                         FM Radio      Switches the source to the
                                       FM radio tuner and dis-
                                       plays the FM radio screen.      AM Radio       AM-1
                                                                   1    2    3    4     5
                         Weather       Switches the source to the   1710
                                       weather radio tuner and
                                       displays the weather radio              P1
                                       screen.
                                                                            1710 kHz
                         Bluetooth     Switches the source to an
                                       external device connected
                                       using Bluetooth wireless
                                       technology, and displays   Source          MPH    Zone Control
                                       the Bluetooth screen.
                         Auxiliary     Switches the source to the
                                       auxiliary device and dis-   Item            Function
                                       plays the auxiliary screen.
                                                                             Decreases the radio sta-
                         Turn Off      Turns the audio system on             tion frequency. Touch and
                                       or off.                               hold this button to auto-
                         Zone Control  Displays the volume ad-               matically seek the next
                                       justment screen for each              available radio station.
                                       zone.                                 Decreases the radio sta-
                                                                             tion frequency.
                        TIP:
                        If multiple external devices are connected at        Increases the radio station
                        the same time, the audio system may not op-          frequency.
                        erate properly. When switching from one ex-
                        ternal device to another one, disconnect the


                        60]]></page><page Index="69"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 61  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                              Item            Function        To change the radio station, tap a preset but-
                                       Increases the radio station   ton.
                                       frequency. Touch and hold
                                       this button to automatically
                                       seek the next available ra-  Bluetooth screen
                                       dio station.           Smartphones and other external devices that
                         Source        Displays the media screen.  are compatible with Bluetooth can be con-
                                                              nected wirelessly to the audio system to lis-
                                                              ten to the audio tracks stored on the devices
                        To change the radio station frequency:
                                                              through the audio system’s speakers.
                        Tap “   ” or “   ” to tune to a receivable
                        frequency.
                                                                       Bluetooth
                        To save a radio station frequency to a preset
                                                                           Best Of You
                        button:                                            Foo Fighters
                        Tune the radio to the desired radio station,       In Your Honor
                        and then touch and hold the desired preset
                        button for several seconds.

                                         1                       Source           MPH    Zone Control
                                  AM Radio      AM-1
                              1    2    3    4    5
                               1710
                                                                   Item            Function
                                          P1                                 Displays the external de-
                                                                             vice management screen.
                                      1710 kHz
                                                                             Displays information about
                                                                             the current audio track.
                           Source            MPH   Zone Control
                        1  Preset button
                                                              To connect an external device:
                        Weather screen                        (1) Tap the “  ” button, and then select
                        You can receive a weather broadcast.     “+Add Device”.
                                                              (2) Turn on the Bluetooth function of the ex-
                                                                 ternal  device, and  then search for the
                                   NOAA National Weather
                                                                 multi-function display unit of the boat.
                                                              TIP:
                                   CH 1 -0.000  kHz           Make sure that other external devices have
                                                              their Bluetooth function disabled before be-
                             1   2   3    4   5   6   7
                                                              ginning the pairing  process  to reduce  con-
                                                              nection issues.
                           Source            MPH   Zone Control




                                                                                               61]]></page><page Index="70"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 62  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        (3) Tap the “Connect” button, and the “Con-  unit or the volume control of the external
                            firm Pairing on  Device”  screen is dis-  device.
                            played.                            To select the audio tracks, use the external
                        (4) Select “OK” for both the multi-function  device.
                            display unit and the external device.
                                                              Zone control screen
                        To disconnect an external device, turn off the  Perform volume adjustment for each zone.
                        Bluetooth function of the external device.
                                                                            Zone Control
                        Auxiliary screen
                        Portable media players  and other external
                        devices can be connected to the audio sys-
                        tem to listen to the audio tracks stored on the
                        devices through the audio system’s speak-
                        ers.

                                                                 Back     Selected Zone: Interior
                                       Auxiliary

                                                              To adjust the volume:
                                                              (1) Tap the highlighted part.
                                                              (2) Adjust by moving the slider control to the
                                                                 left or right.
                                                              (3) Tap “Back”.
                                            MPH
                           Source                  Zone Control
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Zones that can be set differ depending on the
                                                              specifications.






                                                       1





                        1  Auxiliary input jack

                        TIP:
                         You can adjust the volume level of the
                          speakers using  the multi-function  display



                        62]]></page><page Index="71"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 63  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                             System control screen                     Setting screen
                        The system control screen can be used to  The setting screen can be used to change the
                        turn the boat lights on and off.      settings of the multi-function display unit.
                        When a light is turned on, it will be indicated
                        on the illustration of the boat shown on the
                                                                              Menu
                        screen.
                                                                       Time         Depth
                                                                       Unit        Brightness
                                                                      Wellness     Language
                                                                            Tuner Region




                                                                   Item            Function
                                                              Time           Displays the time setting
                            Courtesy
                                                                             screen.
                                                              Depth          Displays the depth alarm
                                                                             setting screen.
                              Item            Function
                                                              Unit           Displays the unit setting
                         Courtesy      Turns the courtesy lights             screen.
                                       on or off. (See page 29 for
                                       information on the location   Brightness  Displays the brightness
                                       of the courtesy lights.)              setting screen.
                                                              Wellness       Displays the maintenance
                                                                             setting screen.
                        To adjust the brightness of the lights:  Language    Displays the language set-
                        Tap the item you want to adjust the bright-          ting screen.
                        ness for, and move the slider control left or  Tuner Region  Displays the tuner region
                                                                             setting screen.
                        right to adjust.
                                         1                    Time setting screen
                                                              Perform settings related to the time.

                                                                              Time
                        1  Slider control
                                                                     12-Hour:    24-Hour:
                        TIP:
                        The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-  GMT Offset:    -4
                        ping the “    ” or “   ” button.
                                                                   Daylight Saving Time:  Disabled

                                                                 Back




                                                                                               63]]></page><page Index="72"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 64  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        To set the time:                      Unit setting screen
                        (1) Select a 12 hour display or 24 hour dis-  The display units for the multi-function dis-
                            play.                             play unit can be changed.
                        (2) Tap “   ” or “  ” to adjust GMT off-
                            set.
                                                                             Set Unit
                        (3) Select to enable or disable daylight sav-
                            ing time.                                        U.S. Std

                        Depth alarm setting screen                    U.S. Std       Metric
                        The water depth for the depth alarm can be
                        set.
                                                                 Back
                                     Set Depth Alarm


                                                              Select “U.S. Std” or “Metric”.
                                        5.0 Ft
                                                              Brightness setting screen
                                                              The multi-function display has a day mode
                                                              and a night mode.
                            Back
                                                              The brightness can be set separately for the
                                         1                    day mode and for the night mode.
                        1  Slider control

                                                                           Set Brightness
                        To adjust the water depth setting:
                        (1) Move the slider control left or right.
                                                                       Night:    30  Day:    90
                        TIP:
                         The water depth can also be adjusted by
                          tapping the “  ” or “  ” button.
                         If the water depth is set to 0.0 m (0.0 ft), the
                          depth alarm will not operate.
                                                                 Back
                        (2) Tap “Back” to complete the setting.
                                                              To set the brightness:
                                                              (1) Set either “Night” or “Day”.
                                                              (2) Move the slider control left or right to ad-
                                                                 just.









                        64]]></page><page Index="73"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 65  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                                              Language setting screen
                                         1                    The language for the  multi-function  display
                                                              unit can be changed.


                        1  Slider control                                  Set Language

                        TIP:
                                                                       English     Espanol
                        The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                        ping the “    ” or “   ” button.                     Francais

                        (3) Tap “Back”.
                                                                 Back
                        Maintenance setting screen
                        This screen displays the number of hours that  To change the language, tap the desired lan-
                        the engines have been running since the last  guage.
                        maintenance.
                                                              Tuner Region setting screen
                                                              Set the region in which the multi-function dis-
                                 Time Since Last Maintenance
                                                              play unit will be used.
                             Port Engine          0  Hrs

                                                                            Tuner Region
                              Starboard Engine    0  Hrs
                                                                     North America  South America
                            Back                     Reset
                                                                       Japan        Taiwan
                        After maintenance is  performed, reset the
                        number of hours of operation as follows.  Back

                        To reset the number of hours of operation:  To change the tuner region, tap the desired
                        (1) Tap the “Reset” button.           region.
                        (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                            pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                            number of hours of operation.

                        TIP:
                        To return to the maintenance setting screen
                        without  resetting the number of hours, tap
                        the “NO” button.




                                                                                               65]]></page><page Index="74"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 66  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                                       Warnings
                        If a malfunction or fault occurs, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning icon and warning
                        message will be displayed on the center display.



                                                    NW       N N     NE E
                                                    NW
                                                                     N
                                      FUEL                                      DEPTH
                                      F
                                                                                DEPTHTHH
                                      F FUEL
                                      50 50 50 5  % % %  F FLOAT MODEE           0 0 0  Ft F F Ft t t
                                                           AT M
                                                              O
                                                               D
                                                         L
                                                         O
                                                   Fuel Level
                                                   Low Fuel Level
                                                                          NEXT
                                                                  °F F
                                                                  °
                                                                          QUIT
                                                        Water Tem
                                                        Water Tempp
                                         S STARTT                             HOUS
                                          TAR
                                                                              HOUSEE
                                                                              11.8
                                         11.8 8  V V                          11 . 8  V V
                                          .
                                         11
                                               Bl
                                                                        a
                                                ower
                                                                             A
                                                                                or
                                         Bilge
                                         Bi lge  Blower                 N Navv  Anchor
                                                                              nc
                                                                               h
                                Name                               Function
                         NEXT                Displays the next active warning. When there is only 1 warning, the dis-
                                             played warning will not change.
                         QUIT                Closes the displayed warning.
                        If the displayed warning message includes instructions, follow those instructions. If you have
                        any questions, consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                                                    NW       N N     N NE E
                                                    NW
                                      FUEL
                                      F FUEL                                    DEPTH
                                                                                DEPTHTHH
                                      F
                                      50 50 50 5  % % %  F FLOAT MODEE           0 0 0  Ft F F Ft t t
                                                           AT M
                                                               D
                                                              O
                                                         O
                                                         L
                                  1                Fuel Level
                                                   Low Fuel Level         NEXT
                                  2                               °F F
                                                                  °
                                                                          QUIT
                                                        Water Temp
                                                        Water Temp
                                         S STARTT                             H HOUSEOUSE
                                          TAR
                                         11.8
                                         11 . 8  V V                          11 . 8  V V
                                                                              11.8
                                                                              nc
                                         Bi
                                                                                or
                                                                               h
                                         Bilge  Blower                  N Nav  Anchor
                                                ower
                                                                        av
                                               Bl
                                          lge
                                                                             A
                        1  Warning title
                        2  Message
                        66]]></page><page Index="75"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 67  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Warning example
                                      Warning title                        Message
                         Check Engine                        Stop Port Engine.
                         Low Oil Pressure                    Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                         Over Temperature
                         Check Engine                        Stop Starboard Engine.
                         Low Oil Pressure                    Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                         Over Temperature
                         House Battery                       Low Voltage.
                                                             Start engine to recharge the battery.
                                                             High Voltage.
                         Start Battery                       Low Voltage.
                                                             Start engine to recharge the battery.
                                                             High Voltage.
                         Fuel Level                          Low Fuel Level
                         Depth                               Low Depth Level
                         Port Engine                         Maintenance Due
                         Starboard Engine                    Maintenance Due
                         Communication Error                 Port Engine.
                                                             Starboard Engine.
                                                             SPU25-15.
                                                             Depth transducer.
                                                             Joystick.
                                                             Pump controller.
                                                             SPU25-15, joystick and depth transducer.
                                                             Engine CAN.
                                                             Stereo.
                                                             GPS.






















                                                                                               67]]></page><page Index="76"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 68  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Check engine warning                  water comes out of the outlets while the en-
                        If an engine sensor malfunction or a short cir-  gines are running, particularly while applying
                        cuit is detected, a warning will appear on the  throttle. If you do not see any water at the
                        multi-function display and the buzzer will  outlets, cooling water may not be circulating
                        sound. If a fault is detected for the engines,  in the engines.
                        “Check Engine” will be displayed. If this oc-
                        curs, reduce the  engine speed,  return to
                        shore, and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check
                        the engine.

                        Low oil pressure warning
                        If the oil pressure does not rise to specifica-
                        tion, a warning will appear on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound. If a                       2
                        fault is  detected for the engines, “Low Oil                    1
                        Pressure” will be displayed. At the same time,  1  Cooling water pilot outlet (starboard engine)
                        the engine speed is automatically limited to  2  Cooling water pilot outlet (port engine)
                        help prevent damage. If this occurs, reduce
                        the engine speed, return to shore or maneu-  TIP:
                        ver to a safe location, and check the engine  If the cooling water passages in the engines
                        oil level. (See page 134 for engine oil level  are dry, it will take about 20 seconds for wa-
                        checking procedures.)                 ter to reach the pilot outlets after starting.
                        If the oil level is low, add enough engine oil to
                        raise it to the proper level. If the oil level is suf-  If water is not circulating, something may be
                        ficient, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the  clogging the intake grates. Refer to “Jet
                        engine.                               pump clean-out procedure” on page 188.

                        Over temperature warning
                        This model is equipped with an over temper-
                        ature warning system. If the engines start to
                        overheat, a warning will appear on the multi-
                        function display and the buzzer will sound. If
                        the engine is over heating, “Over Tempera-
                        ture” will be displayed. At the same time, the
                                                                        1
                        engine speed is automatically limited to help
                        prevent damage. If this occurs, immediately
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore or
                                                              1  Intake grate
                        maneuver to a safe location, and check for
                        water discharge at the cooling water pilot
                        outlets. There are cooling water pilot outlets
                        on the starboard side of the hull. Check that



                        68]]></page><page Index="77"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 69  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                         NOTICE                               fuel tank as soon as possible. (See page 132
                                                              for information on filling the fuel tank.)
                        If the  cause of overheating  cannot be
                        found and corrected, take special precau-  Depth warning
                        tions to avoid major engine damage while  If the boat enters an area that is shallower
                        you return to shore.                  than the water depth set for the depth alarm,
                        Single engine overheating — Shut off the  the depth warning will be activated and the
                        overheating engine and use the properly  buzzer will sound.
                        running engine to return to shore. Operate  If the warning is activated, move the boat to
                        at no-wake speed (8 km/h, 5 mph) to pre-  an area that is deeper than the water depth
                        vent water from flooding the non-operat-  set for the depth alarm. (See page 64 for in-
                        ing engine through the water intake. See  formation on setting the depth alarm.)
                        page 49 for  information on the no-wake
                        mode.
                        Both  engines overheating  — If getting a
                        tow from another vessel is not possible,
                        operate both engines just slightly above
                        idle while you return to shore. If you can be
                        towed, refer to “Towing the boat” on page
                        196.

                        House/Start Battery voltage warning
                        If “House Battery” “Start Battery” appears on
                        the multi-function display and the buzzer will
                        sound, check the battery connections. If the
                        battery connections are clean and tight and
                        the  warning indication continues, have a
                        Yamaha Boat Dealer check the charging sys-
                        tem.

                        Communication error warning
                        If a communication error is detected for the
                        GPS function, a sensor, or other device, a
                        warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                        play and the buzzer will sound. If this occurs,
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore, and
                        have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.

                        Low fuel level warning
                        If “Fuel Level” appears on the multi-function
                        display and the buzzer will sound, refill the


                                                                                               69]]></page><page Index="78"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 70  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                   Helm controls (252S / 252SE / 252XE / 252SD)






                                        1

                                                       2       3




                                                               252S            252SE/252SD
                                                                                    4   5
                                                                    4
                                                                        5                  6
                                                                           6
                                                                                            7
                                                                           7

                                                                 9               9
                                                                      8                8


                                                                 10
                                                                          11

                                                                  5V
                                        12




                        1  Multi-function display unit
                        2  Phone holder
                        3  Controller
                        4  “HORN” switch
                        5  “BILGE” switch
                        6  “BLOWER” switch
                        7  “ACC”2 switch
                        8  “ACC”1 switch
                        9  “NAV LIGHT” switch
                        10 USB charger
                        11 Aux input







                        70]]></page><page Index="79"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 71  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Switch panel (252S / 252SE / 252SD)   “HORN” switch
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-  Activates the horn. The horn can be used to
                        play directly, you can use the switches to op-  signal other boats as required by the “Rules
                        erate various functions.              of the road”. (See page 20.)
                        252S                                  The switch light comes on while the horn is
                                                              operating.
                                                 1
                                                              “BILGE” switch
                                                     2        Turns the bilge pump on or off. (See page
                                                       3      137.)
                                                              The switch light  comes on while the  bilge
                                                       4      pump is operating.
                                            6                 TIP:
                                                 5            Even if the bilge pump is turned off, the pump
                                                              will operate every 2 minutes when the house
                        1  “HORN” switch                      battery switch is in the on position.
                        2  “BILGE” switch
                        3  “BLOWER” switch                    “BLOWER” switch
                        4  “ACC”2 switch                      Turns the blowers on or off. (See page 147.)
                        5  “ACC”1 switch                      The switch light comes on while the blowers
                        6  “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                                                              are operating.
                        252SE / 252SD
                                                              “ACC”1/“ACC”2 switch
                                                              These switches can be used to operate an
                                                1             electronic device that is installed later as an
                                                     2
                                                              accessory.
                                                       3      For more information, contact a  Yamaha
                                                              Boat Dealer.
                                                       4
                                                              “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                                            6
                                                              Turns the navigation lights (anchor light and
                                                 5
                                                              bow light) on or off. Each time the switch is
                                                              pushed, the combination of lights that are on
                        1  “HORN” switch
                                                              or off changes in the following 3 patterns.
                        2  “BILGE” switch
                        3  “BLOWER” switch                    Switch   Anchor   Bow   Multi-function
                                                              light   light  light   display
                        4  “ACC”2 switch
                                                              Off     Off    Off     -
                        5  “ACC”1 switch
                        6  “NAV LIGHTS” switch                On      On     On
                                                                                         Nav
                                                              On      On     Off
                                                                                        Anchor



                                                                                               71]]></page><page Index="80"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 72  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                           Multi-function display unit        Volume control mode
                                    operation                 Turn the joystick knob to change the audio
                                                              volume.
                        Because the multi-function display unit is
                        equipped with a touch screen, you can touch
                        the display directly to operate  the display
                        functions.                                            VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                        In addition to touching the display, you can       HOME   CANCEL
                        use the joystick to operate the display func-
                        tions.                                                         1

                        Touching the multi-function display                 CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE
                                                                                NO WAKE
                                                              1  Joystick knob
                                                 RUNNING MODE
                                      SE  S  SW
                             FUEL                    DEPTH
                             100 %                   .8 9  ft  Navigation control mode
                              19                    19
                                  x1000 rpm     x1000 rpm     (1) Turn the joystick knob to change the se-
                                         MPH
                              START                 HOUSE        lected setting or item.
                              13.0  V  9          9  13.0  V
                                   Bilge  Blower  Nav  Anchor
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                        Using the joystick                                             1
                        This joystick has the following two operation
                        modes.
                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                         Volume control mode
                                                                            NO WAKE
                                                                                NO WAKE
                         Navigation control mode
                        Push the  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button to
                                                              1  Joystick knob
                        switch the operation mode.
                                         1                    (2) Push the joystick knob to select an item
                                                                 or confirm a setting.
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL



                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE


                        1  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button


                        72]]></page><page Index="81"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 73  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                                                     Operation buttons
                                                              In addition to touching the multi-function dis-
                                                              play directly, you can use the operation but-
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL            tons and the controller to operate  various
                                                              functions.
                                                              Controller
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                           1   2 3
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                        TIP:
                        Although the procedures in this manual ex-
                        plain how to make selections by touching the
                        display, you can also make selections using         CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                                NO WAKE
                                                                            NO WAKE
                        the joystick knob.
                                                                             4   5
                                                                      Name          Function
                                                               1  “HOME” button  Displays the home
                                                                               screen. (See page 80.)
                                                               2  “VOLUME  –   Switches the joystick
                                                                  (SCROLL)” but-  between the volume
                                                                  ton          control mode and the
                                                                               navigation control
                                                                               mode. When the main
                                                                               switches are turned to
                                                                               the on position, the
                                                                               volume control mode
                                                                               is selected by default.
                                                               3  “CANCEL” but-  Deselects the current-
                                                                  ton          ly selected item.
                                                               4  “CRUISE/NO   Activate and set the
                                                                  WAKE” (–) but-  cruise assist, no-wake
                                                                  ton          mode, and reverse
                                                               5  “CRUISE/NO   RPM control. (See the
                                                                  WAKE” (+) but-  following sections.)
                                                                  ton


                                                              Operating the boat at a steady speed
                                                              (cruise assist)
                                                              The cruise assist feature is for steady engine
                                                              speed operation when the boat is traveling
                                                              above no-wake speeds. The cruise assist is
                                                              available for use whenever the engines are


                                                                                               73]]></page><page Index="82"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 74  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        running above  3000  rpm and below  7000  When “Cruise” and the cruise assist setting
                        rpm.                                  level disappear, the cruise assist is deactivat-
                        To activate the cruise assist:        ed.
                        (1) Push the remote control levers forward
                            to open the throttle until the desired en-  Operating the boat with a minimal
                            gine speed is reached and both engines  wake (no-wake mode)
                            are operating at the same engine speed.  The no-wake mode is useful for operating the
                        (2) Push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button  boat at a steady speed with a minimal wake.
                            or “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button. When  This is especially convenient when traveling
                            the cruise assist is activated, “Cruise”  in harbors, channels, or other areas posted
                            and the cruise assist setting level will be  with low speed limits as “no wake zones”.
                            displayed under the boat speed.   The no-wake mode can be  activated only
                                                              when the engines are operating at idle speed.
                                  SE      S      SW           To activate the no-wake mode:
                                                              (1) Put the remote control levers in the TDE
                                                                 position or forward position so that both
                                                                 engines are operating at idle speed.
                                                              (2) Push the  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) but-
                                         MPH                     ton. When the no-wake mode is activat-
                                                                 ed, “No Wake” will be displayed under
                                       Cruise +4
                                                                 the boat speed.
                                           1
                                                                       SE      S      SW
                        1  Cruise assist setting level

                         Once the cruise assist is activated, the set
                          engine speed can be increased by pushing
                          the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button or de-
                          creased by  pushing the  “CRUISE/NO                 MPH
                          WAKE” (–) button. However, the  adjust-            No Wake
                          ment is limited to a maximum of 8 incre-
                          ments above or below the initial cruise              1
                          assist setting. Each  time a button is  1  “No Wake”
                          pushed, the engine speed will increase or
                          decrease approximately 100–200 rpm.  The no-wake mode can be set to 3 engine
                         While the cruise assist is activated, the en-  speeds. To adjust the engine speed while the
                          gine speed can also be adjusted by operat-  no-wake  mode is activated, push the
                          ing the remote control levers.      “CRUISE/NO   WAKE”   (+)  button  or
                                                              “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button.
                        To deactivate the cruise assist:      To deactivate the no-wake mode:
                        Operate the remote control  levers  to de-  Perform one of the following operations.
                        crease the engine speed to 3000 rpm or less.


                        74]]></page><page Index="83"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 75  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                         Push the “CRUISE/NO  WAKE” (–) button
                          repeatedly until “No Wake” disappears.
                         Push the remote control levers forward to
                          open the throttle.

                        Operating the boat in reverse with
                        more thrust (reverse RPM control)
                        Engine speed in reverse is limited to approx-
                        imately 4500 rpm. If more thrust is required
                        when the boat is traveling in reverse, use the
                        reverse RPM control.  WARNING! Be pre-
                        pared to reduce throttle as soon  as the
                        boat moves  as desired.  Otherwise, the
                        boat may become unstable, which could
                        result in loss of control and an accident.
                        To activate the reverse RPM control:
                        (1) Move the remote control levers back-
                            ward so that the throttle is opened in re-
                            verse and both engines are operating at
                            the same engine speed.
                        (2) Increase the engine speed to 4500 rpm,
                            and then push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE”
                            (+) button.
                        Once the reverse RPM control is activated,
                        pushing the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                        will increase the available  engine speed by
                        approximately 500 rpm in 3 stages up to a
                        maximum  of 6000 rpm, and pushing  the
                        “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button will decrease
                        the available engine speed. However, the ad-
                        justment is limited to these 3 increments.
                        To deactivate the reverse RPM control:
                        Operate the remote control  levers  to de-
                        crease the engine speed to less than 4500
                        rpm.












                                                                                               75]]></page><page Index="84"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 76  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                           Multi-function display elements

                              1         2          3        4                   5         6
                                                                                RUNNING MODE
                                                     SE     S      SW
                           FUEL                                                             DEPTH
                           100 %                                                            .8 9  ft

                               19                                                        19
                                        x1000 rpm                             x1000 rpm
                                                           MPH
                              START                                                     HOUSE
                              13.0  V  9                                           9    13.0  V
                                          Bilge  Blower               Nav  Anchor
                           15 14 13     12                 11                 10     9   8   7
                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Clock               Shows the time. Tap the clock to set the time. (See page 90.)
                          2  Port engine tachometer  Shows the engine speed.
                          3  Center display      Shows various information for each screen tab.
                          4  Screen tab bar      Shows the tabs for the various screens that can be shown on the
                                                 center display.
                          5  Starboard engine ta-  Shows the engine speed.
                             chometer
                          6  Mode status         Shows the current mode. (See page 79.)
                          7  Depth level bar graph  Shows the water depth in feet or meters. Depending on the depth
                                                 alarm setting and detected water depth, the color of the bar graph
                                                 segments changes.
                          8  House battery voltage  Shows the house battery voltage in a bar graph format and numer-
                                                 ical format.
                          9  Operation mode button  Switches the operation mode. This button can be used only when
                                                 the remote control levers are in the neutral position. (See page 79.)
                         10  Starboard shift indicator  Shows the current shift position for the starboard jet thrust nozzle.
                                                 This indicator appears only when the engine is running.
                         11  Status indicator bar  Shows the operating status of various functions and displays warn-
                                                 ings.
                         12  Port shift indicator  Shows the current shift position for the port jet thrust nozzle. This
                                                 indicator appears only when the engine is running.
                         13  Warning mute button  Mutes the sound of the buzzer for a specific time depending on the
                                                 warnings present.
                         14  Start battery voltage  Shows the start battery voltage in a bar graph format and numeri-
                                                 cal format.
                         15  Fuel level bar graph  Shows the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Depending on
                                                 the amount of remaining fuel, the color of the bar graph segments
                                                 changes.


                        76]]></page><page Index="85"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 77  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        If the multi-function display unit is turned on while the engines are stopped, the display unit
                        will enter the float mode.
                        When the multi-function display unit is in the float mode, the following items are different than
                        they are in the running mode.
                                                  1                   2

                                                                        FLOAT MODE

                                FUEL                                                  DEPTH
                                 100 %       FM Radio                                 .8 9  ft

                                                                   Water Temp
                                      19  107.7 MHz                               19
                                                Her By                    °F



                                     START                                        HOUSE
                                    13.0  V  9                              9    13.0  V
                                                   Bilge  B       Anchor



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Audio system function  Shows the selected function of the audio system.
                          2  Water temperature   Shows the ambient water temperature in degrees Fahrenheit or
                                                 degrees Celsius.


                        Screen tab bar
                                          1     2     3     4     5     6     7




                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Home screen tab     Displays the home screen. (See page 80.)
                          2  Map screen tab      Displays the map screen. (See page 80.)
                          3  Trip screen tab     Displays the trip screen. (See page 84.)
                          4  Drive control screen tab  Displays the drive control screen. (See page 85.)
                          5  Media screen tab    Displays the media screen. (See page 86.)
                          6  System control screen   Displays the system control screen. (See page 89.)
                             tab
                          7  Setting screen tab  Displays the setting screen. (See page 90.)




                                                                                               77]]></page><page Index="86"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 78  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Status indicator bar

                                        1      2            3            4      5

                                       Bilge  Blower                    Nav   Anchor

                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Bilge pump indicator  Shows the operating status of the bilge pump. When the bilge
                                                 pump is stopped, the indicator will be gray, and when the bilge
                                                 pump is operating, the indicator will be blue.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to change the bilge pump setting.
                          2  Blower indicator    Shows the operating status of the blowers. When the house bat-
                                                 tery switch is turned to the on position, a 5-minute timer will be
                                                 shown in this indicator while the blowers operate automatically.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the blowers on or off.
                          3  Warning icon bar    Displays the warning icons.
                                                 When a warning icon is displayed, tap the icon to display the
                                                 warning message for that icon.
                          4  Navigation light indicator  Shows the operating status of the navigation light mode. (When
                                                 the navigation light mode is activated, the bow light and anchor
                                                 light are turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the navigation light mode on
                                                 or off.
                          5  Anchor light indicator  Shows the operating status of the anchor light mode. (When the
                                                 anchor light mode is activated, only the anchor light is turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the anchor light mode on or
                                                 off.






























                        78]]></page><page Index="87"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 79  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Operation mode                        DRiVE mode “  ” (252SD)
                        When the engines are running and both re-  Both engines are operated at the same en-
                        mote control levers are in the neutral position,  gine speed and  the throttle  and shifting of
                        the operation mode can be changed by tap-  both engines are controlled using the left and
                        ping the operation mode button.       right throttle/shift paddles. “DRiVE” is shown
                                                              for the mode status.
                                         1     2
                                                              Use this mode to make small throttle adjust-
                                                              ments  when operating  the boat at  slow
                                        RUNNING MODE
                                                              speeds, such as when docking. (See page 42
                              SW
                               NE
                                                  DEPTH       for information on the throttle/shift paddles.)
                                                  .8 9  ft
                                               19
                                       x1000 rpm              TIP:
                                                               If the remote control levers are moved from
                          H
                                               HOUSE           the neutral position to the forward or re-
                                           9   13.0  V
                                 Nav  Anchor                   verse position while the throttle/shift pad-
                                                               dles are not being operated, the operation
                        1  Mode status
                        2  Operation mode button               mode will change to the running mode.
                                                               When the DRiVE mode is activated, the en-
                        Float mode                             gine speed will be controlled.
                        Both engines are stopped. “FLOAT-MODE”
                        is shown for the mode status.
                        The audio system function and water temper-
                        ature are shown instead of the port and star-
                        board tachometers.

                        Running mode “  ”
                        The port and starboard remote control levers
                        control the throttle and shifting for their re-
                        spective engines.  “RUNNING-MODE” is
                        shown for the mode status.

                        Single lever mode “  ”
                        Both engines are operated at the same en-
                        gine  speed and the throttle  and shifting of
                        both  engines are  controlled using only  the
                        port remote control lever. “SINGLE-LEVER”
                        is shown for the mode status.
                        The starboard remote control lever is not
                        used.






                                                                                               79]]></page><page Index="88"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 80  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Home screen                            Map screen
                        This screen shows the boat speed, current  This screen displays a map.
                        heading of the boat, and other information.
                           1             2             3
                                   SE     S    SW





                                         MPH
                                                                                 MPH
                                                                                         REC
                                                                   Item            Function
                                Name           Function                      Shows the direction of
                         1  Boat speed    Shows the boat speed               North at the top of the
                                          in miles per hour or ki-           screen, or the current
                                          lometers per hour.                 course being traveled at
                                                                             the top of the screen.
                         2  Heading       Shows the heading of
                                          the boat.
                         3  Cruise  as-   Shows whether the                  Zooms out to display a
                            sist/no-wake   cruise assist or no-              more distant view of the
                            mode status in-  wake mode is activat-           map.
                            dicator       ed.                                Zooms in to display a clos-
                                          When the cruise assist             er view of the map.
                                          is activated, “Cruise”
                                          and the cruise assist
                                          setting level will be dis-         Displays the Map Settings.
                                          played.
                                          When the no-wake
                                          mode is activated, “No
                                          Wake” will be dis-                 Records and Stops record-
                                          played.                    REC     ing a Track.

                                                                             Adds a waypoint.




                                                              Waypoint
                                                              Set a waypoint for a destination on the map.
                                                              Waypoints can be attached to any location.
                                                              The  “Add Waypoint”  screen is displayed
                                                              when a waypoint is attached.






                        80]]></page><page Index="89"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 81  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation



                                    Waypoint Manager                     Waypoint Manager
                             GR8                                       GR8            EDIT

                                                                      Lat:         26.9484
                                                                      Lon:         -80.0968
                                                                      Distance:    204.39  m

                           Close                   Add Waypoit   Close   Delete   View     GoTo

                                                                   Item            Function
                        To add a Waypoint:                                  Changes the color of the
                        (1) Display the location you want to attach a       waypoint.
                            waypoint to on the map.
                        (2) Tap “   ”.                        View          Views the waypoint on the
                                                                            map.
                        (3) Switch  to the “Add Waypoint”  screen,
                                                              GoTo          Provides the distance to the
                            and select any letters.
                                                                            waypoint, along with the
                                                                            latitude and longitude. It
                                                                            also tells when you have ar-
                                                                            rived at the waypoint and
                                                                            asks if you would like to
                                                                            stop the navigation.
                                                              Delete        Deletes the waypoint.
                                     1
                                                              EDIT          Changes the name of the
                                            2                               waypoint.
                              NEXT WAYPOINT 1.7 km
                                   29°
                                            MPH
                                                    REC       Cruising to the destination:
                                                              (1) Select the waypoint created on the map.
                                                              (2) Tap “GOTO”.
                        (4) Tap “Save”.
                                                                      BAY
                        When the waypoint is set, “Waypoint Manag-    Distance:  12.06
                        er” is displayed, and the latitude and longi-  Lat: 45.28001
                        tude of the set waypoint are displayed along  Lon: -92.97718
                        with the distance from the current location.



                                                                        Delete     Edit







                                                                                               81]]></page><page Index="90"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 82  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation


                        TIP:                                       Item            Function
                        To stop tracking, tap “STOP”.         Save          When the recording stops,
                                                                            a Save Track prompt will
                                                                            appear. Choosing Save will
                        Map settings screen                                 display the Add Track
                        Perform settings for  waypoints  and tracks,        screen shown below. Spin
                        etc. on the Map Settings screen.                    the dials to choose a three-
                                                                            letter name and touch Save
                                                                            when complete.
                        Waypoints
                        Perform waypoint management. Tap “Way-
                                                              To change a track name:
                        points” to display “Waypoint Manager”.
                                                              (1) Tap Track Name.
                                                              (2) Select any letters on  the  “Add  Track”
                                      Map Settings               screen.
                              Waypoints
                                                                             Add Track
                              Tracks
                              Satellite Status
                                                                               A    B
                              Depth / Position
                                                                          A    B    C
                             Close
                                                                          B    C    D

                                                                 Cancel                    Save
                        Tracks
                        Perform track management. Tap “Tracks” to
                        display “Track Manager”.
                                                              (3) Tap “Save”.

                                      Track Manager           Tap “   ” to display the track management
                              DOK                             screen.
                              <Current>
                                                                          Track Manager
                                                                        <Current>     EDIT

                             Close                Record Track         Distance:    0.00  ft


                             Item            Function
                         Record Track /   Records the current path   Close        Show
                         Stop Recording  (track) being driven, or halts
                                       the recording of the track.






                        82]]></page><page Index="91"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 83  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                             Item            Function         Chart Setup
                                                              Perform settings for functions displayed on
                                       Changes the color of the
                                       track.                 the map.
                         EDIT          Changes the name of, or              Chart Setup
                                       deletes, the track.
                         Show / Hide   Shows the track on the
                                       map. Hide will make that      SHOW GRIDS    SHOW  TRACKS
                                       track invisible.
                                                                     SHOW TEXT     SHOW NAV AIDS
                         Close         Returns to the Track Man-
                                       ager screen.
                                                                     SHOW WAYPOINTS  SHOW WAYPOINT NAMES
                                                                 Close
                        Satellite status
                        Display detectable satellites.

                                                              To perform settings, select the item you want
                               Satellite Status  N
                                                              to display.
                            SATELLITES     3
                            9:47
                            Latitude:  35.6060
                            Longitude:  -84.2541
                            Op Mode:  0.00  W         E
                            HDOP:  0.00
                            VDOP:  0.00
                            TDOP:  0.00
                            SOG:  0.0
                            COG:  0
                                               S
                            Close
                        Depth / Position
                        Perform  settings  for contour lines and  safe
                        depths.


                                      Depth / Position
                            DEPTH CONTOUR
                              All  66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                            SAFETY CONTOUR
                              66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft

                            Close



                        To perform settings, select the desired depth.
                        Set depths are reflected on the map.



                                                                                               83]]></page><page Index="92"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 84  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                   Trip screen                    Name             Function
                        This screen displays the hours of engine op-  Water   Shows the ambient water
                        eration, fuel consumption, and other informa-  Temperature*  temperature in degrees
                                                                            Fahrenheit or degrees Cel-
                        tion.                                               sius.
                                        1            2 3      Average Speed  Shows the average boat
                                                                            speed in miles per hour or
                                 NW       N       NE                        kilometers per hour.
                                Economy :    0.0 MPG          Highest Speed  Shows the highest speed of
                                                                            the boat in miles per hour or
                              Trip Distance:  0.0 Mi                        kilometers per hour.
                                                              Port Engine   Shows the total number of
                                Fuel Used :  0.0 Gal
                                                              Hours*        hours that the port engine
                                                                            has been running since the
                                Fuel Flow :  0.0 GPH
                                                                            boat was new.
                                                              Starboard     Shows the total number of
                                                    Reset All
                                                              Engine Hours*  hours that the starboard en-
                                                                            gine has been running since
                        1  Menu
                                                                            the boat was new.
                        2  Scrollbar
                        3  “Reset All” button                 * This item cannot be reset.
                        The menu displays the following items. Scroll  To reset an item on the trip screen:
                        through the menu items using the scrollbar.  Touch and hold the “  ” of the item that
                             Name            Function         you want to reset for several seconds.
                         Economy       Shows the average dis-
                                       tance that can be traveled   To reset all of the display items:
                                       on 1.0 gallon or 1.0 liter of
                                       fuel. When gallons are se-  Touch the “Reset All” button to reset all of the
                                       lected for the display units,   items.
                                       the value is shown in miles
                                       and when liters are selected
                                       for the display units, the
                                       value is shown in kilome-
                                       ters.
                         Trip Distance  Shows the distance trav-
                                       eled by the boat in miles or
                                       kilometers since the item
                                       was last reset.
                         Fuel Used     Shows the total fuel that
                                       has been consumed by the
                                       port and starboard engines
                                       in gallons or liters.
                         Fuel Flow*    Shows the total fuel con-
                                       sumption of the port and
                                       starboard engines in gal-
                                       lons per hour or liters per
                                       hour.





                        84]]></page><page Index="93"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 85  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                              Drive control screen            (5) 252XE: Tap the desired ballast level.
                        This screen can be used to set a target speed  (6) 252XE: Tap “  ” or “  ”  to set the
                        for the boat, increase the set speed.    weight of each ballast tank.

                              WKS  WKB
                              Target Speed   21.0
                              Acceleration   Fast
                                                                  Fill All               Drain All
                                                                         35    45   35


                                                                 Back        Activate
                            Set                       Save

                                                              TIP:
                        To activate the drive control:         Tap “Fill All” to make all of the tanks 100%,
                        (1) Tap the tab you want to set.       and tap “Drain All” to make all of the tanks
                        (2) Tap the target speed.              0%.
                        (3) To set  the speed,  tap each digit and   Tap “Activate” to activate the ballast.
                            scroll up or down, and  then tap the
                            “Back” button.                    (7) Tap the “Save” button.
                                                              (8) Select the characters you want to  set,
                                                                 tap the “Save” button.
                                                              (9) After setting the preceding items, tap the
                                                                 “Set” button.
                                                              (10) Move the remote control levers to the ful-
                                    8         0                  ly open position.
                                                              TIP:
                                    9         1                If the remote control levers are  moved
                                                               slowly to the fully open position, the boat
                                                               may not accelerate according to the select-
                                                               ed acceleration profile or reach the set tar-
                        (4) Tap the desired acceleration profile.
                                                               get speed.
                        TIP:
                                                               If the single lever mode is activated, move
                        You can select from “Manual”, “Slow”, and
                                                               only the remote control lever for the port
                        “Medium”.
                                                               engine to the fully open position. (See page
                                                               79 for information on the single lever mode
                                                               button.)
                                                               252SD: While the DRiVE mode is activated,
                                                               the drive control mode cannot be used.





                                                                                               85]]></page><page Index="94"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 86  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        To deactivate the drive control:                Media screen
                        (1) Return the remote control levers to the  This screen can be used to receive a radio
                            neutral position.                 broadcast, connect to an external device us-
                        (2) Tap the “CANCEL” button.          ing Bluetooth wireless technology, and per-
                                                              form other functions.


                                                                             Source
                                                                       AM Radio    FM Radio
                                                                       Weather     Bluetooth
                                                                             Auxiliary


                                                                 Turn Off   Select a Source  Zone Control

                                                                   Item            Function
                                                              AM Radio       Switches the source to the
                                                                             AM radio tuner and dis-
                                                                             plays the AM radio screen.
                                                              FM Radio       Switches the source to the
                                                                             FM radio tuner and dis-
                                                                             plays the FM radio screen.
                                                              Weather        Switches the source to the
                                                                             weather radio tuner and
                                                                             displays the weather radio
                                                                             screen.
                                                              Bluetooth      Switches the source to an
                                                                             external device connected
                                                                             using Bluetooth wireless
                                                                             technology, and displays
                                                                             the Bluetooth screen.
                                                              Auxiliary      Switches the source to the
                                                                             auxiliary device and dis-
                                                                             plays the auxiliary screen.
                                                              Turn Off       Turns the audio system on
                                                                             or off.
                                                              Zone Control   Displays the volume ad-
                                                                             justment screen for each
                                                                             zone.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              If multiple external devices are connected at
                                                              the same time, the audio system may not op-
                                                              erate properly. When switching from one ex-
                                                              ternal device to another one, disconnect the


                        86]]></page><page Index="95"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 87  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        currently  connected device,  and then con-  Item          Function
                        nect the other device.                               Increases the radio station
                                                                             frequency. Touch and hold
                                                                             this button to automatically
                        To change the volume:
                                                                             seek the next available ra-
                        The following slider is displayed in each            dio station.
                        screen.                               Source         Displays the media screen.
                        Use the slider control to change the volume.

                                         1                    To change the radio station frequency:
                                                              Tap “   ” or “  ” to tune to a receivable
                                                              frequency.

                        1  Slider control                     To save a radio station frequency to a preset
                                                              button:
                        TIP:                                  Tune the radio to the desired radio station,
                        The volume can also be adjusted by tapping  and then touch and hold the desired preset
                        the  “    ”  or  “  ”  button.        button for several seconds.

                                                                               1
                        Radio screen (AM/FM)
                        You can receive a radio broadcast.             AM Radio       AM-1
                                                                   1    2    3    4    5
                                                                    1710
                                  AM Radio      AM-1                           P1
                              1    2    3    4    5
                               1710
                                                                           1710 kHz
                                          P1
                                      1710 kHz
                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control

                                                              1  Preset button
                            Source           MPH   Zone Control

                              Item            Function
                                       Decreases the radio sta-
                                       tion frequency. Touch and
                                       hold this button to auto-
                                       matically seek the next
                                       available radio station.
                                       Decreases the radio sta-
                                       tion frequency.

                                       Increases the radio station
                                       frequency.





                                                                                               87]]></page><page Index="96"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 88  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Weather screen                        To connect an external device:
                        You can receive a weather broadcast.  (1) Tap the “  ” button, and then select
                                                                 “+Add Device”.
                                                              (2) Turn on the Bluetooth function of the ex-
                                   NOAA National Weather
                                                                 ternal  device, and  then search for the
                                                                 multi-function display unit of the boat.
                                   CH 1 -0.000  kHz           TIP:
                                                              Make sure that other external devices have
                             1   2   3    4   5   6   7
                                                              their Bluetooth function disabled before be-
                                                              ginning the pairing  process  to reduce  con-
                                                              nection issues.
                           Source            MPH   Zone Control

                                                              (3) Tap the “Connect” button, and the “Con-
                        To change the radio station, tap a preset but-  firm Pairing on Device”  screen is  dis-
                        ton.                                     played.
                                                              (4) Select “OK” for both the multi-function
                        Bluetooth screen                         display unit and the external device.
                        Smartphones and other external devices that
                        are compatible with Bluetooth can be con-  To disconnect an external device, turn off the
                        nected wirelessly to the audio system to lis-  Bluetooth function of the external device.
                        ten to the audio tracks stored on the devices
                        through the audio system’s speakers.  Auxiliary screen
                                                              Portable media players  and other external
                                                              devices can be connected to the audio sys-
                                 Bluetooth
                                                              tem to listen to the audio tracks stored on the
                                      Best Of You             devices through the audio system’s speak-
                                      Foo Fighters            ers.
                                      In Your Honor

                                                                             Auxiliary

                           Source            MPH   Zone Control


                              Item            Function
                                       Displays the external de-
                                       vice management screen.
                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control
                                       Displays information about
                                       the current audio track.






                        88]]></page><page Index="97"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 89  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                                                   System control screen
                                                              The system control screen can be used to
                                                              turn the boat lights on and off.
                                                              When a light is turned on, it will be indicated
                                                              on the illustration of the boat shown on the
                                                              screen.
                                                       1

                                                5V


                        1  Auxiliary input jack

                        TIP:
                         You can adjust the volume level of the
                          speakers using  the multi-function  display  Courtesy
                          unit or the volume control of the external
                          device.
                                                                   Item            Function
                         To select the audio tracks, use the external
                                                              Courtesy       Turns the courtesy lights
                          device.                                            on or off. (See page 29 for
                                                                             information on the location
                        Zone control screen                                  of the courtesy lights.)
                        Perform volume adjustment for each zone.  Docking    Turns the docking lights on
                                                                             or off.
                                                              Tower          Turns the tower lights on or
                                      Zone Control                           off.
                                                              Helm           Turns the illumination on or
                                                              (252SE / 252SD)  off for the panels on the
                                                                             port and starboard sides of
                                                                             the steering wheel.
                                                              Shower (252S /   Turns the shower pump on
                                                              252SE / 252SD)  or off. (See page 117 for in-
                                                                             formation on the shower.)
                            Back    Selected Zone: Interior
                                                              To adjust the brightness of the lights:
                                                              Tap the item you want to adjust the bright-
                        To adjust the volume:                 ness for, and move the slider control left or
                        (1) Tap the highlighted part.         right to adjust.
                        (2) Adjust by moving the slider control to the
                            left or right.
                        (3) Tap “Back”.
                        TIP:
                        Zones that can be set differ depending on the
                        specifications.


                                                                                               89]]></page><page Index="98"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 90  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                                                       Setting screen
                                         1
                                                              The setting screen can be used to change the
                                                              settings of the multi-function display unit.

                        1  Slider control
                                                                              Menu
                        TIP:                                           Time         Depth
                        The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-    Unit        Brightness
                        ping the “    ” or “   ” button.
                                                                      Wellness     Language
                                                                            Tuner Region




                                                                   Item            Function
                                                              Time           Displays the time setting
                                                                             screen.
                                                              Depth          Displays the depth alarm
                                                                             setting screen.
                                                              Unit           Displays the unit setting
                                                                             screen.
                                                              Brightness     Displays the brightness
                                                                             setting screen.
                                                              Wellness       Displays the maintenance
                                                                             setting screen.
                                                              Language       Displays the language set-
                                                                             ting screen.
                                                              Tuner Region   Displays the tuner region
                                                                             setting screen.


                                                              Time setting screen
                                                              Perform settings related to the time.

                                                                              Time
                                                                     12-Hour:    24-Hour:

                                                                     GMT Offset:    -4

                                                                   Daylight Saving Time:  Disabled

                                                                 Back




                        90]]></page><page Index="99"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 91  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        To set the time:
                        (1) Select a 12 hour display or 24 hour dis-
                                                                             Set Unit
                            play.
                        (2) Tap “   ” or “  ” to adjust GMT off-             U.S. Std
                            set.
                        (3) Select to enable or disable daylight sav-  U.S. Std      Metric
                            ing time.

                        Depth alarm setting screen
                                                                 Back
                        The water depth for the depth alarm can be
                        set.
                                                              Select “U.S. Std” or “Metric”.
                                     Set Depth Alarm
                                                              Brightness setting screen
                                                              The multi-function display has a day mode
                                        5.0 Ft
                                                              and a night mode.
                                                              The brightness can be set separately for the
                                                              day mode and for the night mode.

                            Back
                                                                           Set Brightness
                                         1
                        1  Slider control
                                                                       Night:    30  Day:    90
                        To adjust the water depth setting:
                        (1) Move the slider control left or right.
                        TIP:
                         The water depth can also be adjusted by
                                                                 Back
                          tapping the “  ” or “  ” button.
                         If the water depth is set to 0.0 m (0.0 ft), the
                          depth alarm will not operate.
                                                              To set the brightness:
                                                              (1) Set either “Night” or “Day”.
                        (2) Tap “Back” to complete the setting.
                                                              (2) Move the slider control left or right to ad-
                                                                 just.
                        Unit setting screen
                        The display units for the multi-function dis-          1
                        play unit can be changed.



                                                              1  Slider control





                                                                                               91]]></page><page Index="100"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 92  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation


                        TIP:                                  Language setting screen
                        The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-  The language for the  multi-function  display
                        ping the “    ” or “   ” button.      unit can be changed.


                        (3) Tap “Back”.                                    Set Language
                        Maintenance setting screen
                                                                       English     Espanol
                        This screen displays the number of hours that
                        the engines have been running since the last         Francais
                        maintenance.


                                 Time Since Last Maintenance     Back
                             Port Engine          0  Hrs
                                                              To change the language, tap the desired lan-
                              Starboard Engine    0  Hrs
                                                              guage.
                                                              Tuner Region setting screen
                            Back                     Reset    Set the region in which the multi-function dis-
                                                              play unit will be used.


                        After maintenance is  performed, reset the
                                                                            Tuner Region
                        number of hours of operation as follows.
                                                                     North America  South America
                        To reset the number of hours of operation:
                        (1) Tap the “Reset” button.
                        (2) When the confirmation message ap-          Japan        Taiwan
                            pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                            number of hours of operation.        Back
                        TIP:
                        To return to the maintenance setting screen
                        without  resetting the number of hours, tap  To change the tuner region, tap the desired
                        the “NO” button.                      region.


                                                              Flush-out ballasts (252XE)
                                                              The flush-out ballasts can be used to drain
                                                              the water in the ballast tanks with the multi-
                                                              function display unit.

                                                              To drain the water in a ballast tank:
                                                              (1) Tap the Drive Control Screen Tab.


                        92]]></page><page Index="101"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 93  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        (2) Tap Ballast Level.                (5) When finished, tap “ON” to return to the
                        (3) Set the value of  the tank you  want  to  previous screen.
                            drain to 0.






                             Fill All              Drain All
                                    0     0    0



                            Back        Activate



                        (4) Tap “  ”. “Ballast Overdrain Initiated” is
                            displayed, and draining starts.



                                Ballast Overdrain Initiated

                              Port      Center    Stbd
                              30        30        30

                              OFF        ON        OFF




                        TIP:
                         The flush-out time cannot be adjusted. The
                          default setting is 30 seconds to avoid dam-
                          aging a ballast pump when there is no wa-
                          ter remaining in a tank and/or to prevent
                          excessive battery drain.
                         If the flush-out time is not sufficient to re-
                          move all the water from a tank, continue
                          the draining process until it is empty. Stop
                          the process immediately once all the water
                          has been removed from each tank.
                          If you have  any questions, consult a
                          Yamaha Boat Dealer.



                                                                                               93]]></page><page Index="102"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 94  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                                       Warnings
                        If a malfunction or fault occurs, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning icon and warning
                        message will be displayed on the display.


                                                                                       O
                                                                                R
                                                                                U
                                                                                 NNING M
                                                                                       D
                                  10 : 27  am                                   RUNNING MODE E
                                  10:27 a
                                      m
                                                     NE E   N N    NW W
                                                                   N
                                                     N
                                                                                            DEPTH
                           FUELL E                                                          D D DEPTH
                           FU
                           100
                           100
                           100 % % %                                                        .8 9.8 ft ft 8 9 9 9
                           100%
                                                          SPEE
                                                          SPEED D
                                                    Check Engine !
                               19 19                Stop the BCU.         NEXT           19 19
                                       x1000 rp
                                                                             1000 rp
                                       x1000 rpm m                           x x1000 rpm m
                                                    Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                                                                    m
                                                                     p
                                                                    mph h  QUIT
                                                                                         U
                                                                                          S
                                                                                        HO
                               TAR
                              S STARTT                                                  HOUSEE
                                                                                        13.00
                              13 . 0  V V  9 9                                     9 9  13 .  V V
                              13.0
                                            g
                                          B
                                           il
                                                                      Nav
                                                                           Anchoror
                                               Blowerer
                                          Bilgee  B l o w             Nav  An c h
                             Name                               Function
                                       Displays the next active warning. When there is only 1 warning, the displayed
                         NEXT
                                       warning will not change.
                         QUIT          Closes the displayed warning.
                        If the displayed warning message includes instructions, follow those instructions. If you have
                        any questions, consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                                                            1
                                  10
                                    :
                                  10:27 a am                                    RUNNING MODE E
                                                                                       O
                                                                                       D
                                    27
                                      m
                                                                                U
                                                                                 NNING M
                                                                                R
                                                                   N
                                                     N
                                                     NE E   N N    NW W
                           FU E                                                             DEPTH
                                                                                            D D DEPTH
                           FUELL
                           100
                           100 % % %                                                        .8 9.8 ft ft 8 9 9 9
                           100
                           100%
                                                          SPEE D
                                                          SPEED
                                                    Check Engine !
                               19 19                Stop the BCU.         NEXT           19 19
                                                                             1000 rp
                                       x1000 rp m                            x x1000 rpm m
                                       x1000 rpm
                                                    Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                                                                    m p h  QUIT
                                                                    mph
                              S STARTT                                                  HO U S
                                                                                        HOUSEE
                               TAR
                                                                                        13
                                                                                         .
                              13 . 0  V V  9 9                                     9 9  13.00  V V
                              13.0
                                          B
                                            g
                                               Blowerer
                                           il
                                                                           Anchoror
                                                                      Nav
                                          Bilgee  B l o w             Nav  An c h
                                                            2
                        1  Warning title
                        2  Message
                        94]]></page><page Index="103"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 95  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Warning example
                                    Warning title                         Message
                         Check Engine
                                                           Stop Port Engine.
                         Low Oil Pressure
                                                           Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                         Over Temperature
                         Check Engine
                                                           Stop Starboard Engine.
                         Low Oil Pressure
                                                           Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                         Over Temperature
                                                           Stop the BCU.
                                                           Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                                                           Stop Steering.
                                                           Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                         Check Engine                      Stop Steering.
                                                           Open service valve of pump. Move cylinder to center
                                                           position. Using the two remote control levers, per-
                                                           form the boat steering operation by the engine
                                                           speed difference.
                                                           Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                                                           Low Voltage.
                         House Battery                     Start engine to recharge the battery.
                                                           High Voltage.
                                                           Low Voltage.
                         Start Battery                     Start engine to recharge the battery.
                                                           High Voltage.
                         Fuel                              Low Fuel Level.
                         Depth                             Low Depth Level.
                                                           Port Engine.
                                                           Check Engine CAN.
                                                           Starboard Engine.
                                                           Check Engine CAN.
                                                           SPU25-15.
                                                           Check Auxiliary CAN.
                                                           Depth Transducer.
                                                           Check Auxiliary CAN.
                                                           Joystick.
                                                           Check Auxiliary CAN.
                         Communication Error
                                                           SPU25-15, Joystick, Stereo and Depth Transducer.
                                                           Check Auxiliary CAN.
                                                           BCU.
                                                           Check Engine CAN.
                                                           No communication with the port engine, the star-
                                                           board engine and the BCU.
                                                           Stereo.
                                                           Check Auxiliary CAN.
                                                           GPS.
                                                           Check NMEA0183 connection.


                                                                                               95]]></page><page Index="104"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 96  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Check engine warning                  water comes out of the outlets while the en-
                        If an engine sensor malfunction or a short cir-  gines are running, particularly while applying
                        cuit is detected, a warning will appear on the  throttle. If you do not see any water at the
                        multi-function display and the buzzer will  outlets, cooling water may not be circulating
                        sound. If a fault is detected for the engines,  in the engines.
                        “Check Engine” will be displayed. If this oc-
                        curs, reduce the  engine speed,  return to
                        shore, and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check
                        the engine.

                        Low oil pressure warning
                        If the oil pressure does not rise to specifica-
                        tion, a warning will appear on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound. If a                       2
                        fault is  detected for the engines, “Low Oil                    1
                        Pressure” will be displayed. At the same time,  1  Cooling water pilot outlet (starboard engine)
                        the engine speed is automatically limited to  2  Cooling water pilot outlet (port engine)
                        help prevent damage. If this occurs, reduce
                        the engine speed, return to shore or maneu-  TIP:
                        ver to a safe location, and check the engine  If the cooling water passages in the engines
                        oil level. (See page 134 for engine oil level  are dry, it will take about 20 seconds for wa-
                        checking procedures.)                 ter to reach the pilot outlets after starting.
                        If the oil level is low, add enough engine oil to
                        raise it to the proper level. If the oil level is suf-  If water is not circulating, something may be
                        ficient, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the  clogging the intake grates. Refer to “Jet
                        engine.                               pump clean-out procedure” on page 188.

                        Over temperature warning
                        This model is equipped with an over temper-
                        ature warning system. If the engines start to
                        overheat, a warning will appear on the multi-
                        function display and the buzzer will sound. If
                        the engine is over heating, “Over Tempera-
                        ture” will be displayed. At the same time, the
                                                                        1
                        engine speed is automatically limited to help
                        prevent damage. If this occurs, immediately
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore or
                                                              1  Intake grate
                        maneuver to a safe location, and check for
                        water discharge at the cooling water pilot
                        outlets. There are cooling water pilot outlets
                        on the starboard side of the hull. Check that



                        96]]></page><page Index="105"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 97  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                         NOTICE                               tank as soon as possible. (See page 132 for
                                                              information on filling the fuel tank.)
                        If the  cause of overheating  cannot be
                        found and corrected, take special precau-  Depth warning
                        tions to avoid major engine damage while  If the boat enters an area that is shallower
                        you return to shore.                  than the water depth set for the depth alarm,
                        Single engine overheating — Shut off the  the depth warning will be activated and the
                        overheating engine and use the properly  buzzer will sound.
                        running engine to return to shore. Operate  If the warning is activated, move the boat to
                        at no-wake speed (8 km/h, 5 mph) to pre-  an area that is deeper than the water depth
                        vent water from flooding the non-operat-  set for the depth alarm. (See page 91 for in-
                        ing engine through the water intake. See  formation on setting the depth alarm.)
                        page 74 for  information on the no-wake
                        mode.
                        Both  engines overheating  — If getting a
                        tow from another vessel is not possible,
                        operate both engines just slightly above
                        idle while you return to shore. If you can be
                        towed, refer to “Towing the boat” on page
                        196.

                        Low/High voltage warning
                        If either “Start Battery” or “House Battery” ap-
                        pears on the multi-function  display and the
                        buzzer will sound, check the battery connec-
                        tions. If the battery connections are clean and
                        tight and the warning indication continues,
                        have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the charg-
                        ing system.

                        Communication error warning
                        If a communication error is detected for the
                        GPS function, a sensor, or other device, a
                        warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                        play and the buzzer will sound. If this occurs,
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore, and
                        have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.

                        Low fuel level warning
                        If “Fuel”  appears  on the multi-function dis-
                        play and the buzzer will sound, refill the fuel


                                                                                               97]]></page><page Index="106"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 98  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                                       Seats                   ator or striking a passenger,  which
                                                               could result in an accident.
                             WARNING
                        Passengers must always sit in a designat-                           1
                        ed  seating area, place feet on  the  deck,
                        and hold on to the handgrips, handrails, or
                        straps when the boat is in motion.

                        This  boat  is equipped with the following
                        seats.
                         1 2 3                     4  5  1



                                                              1  Bow filler cushion
                                                              These cushions can also be used to create a
                                                              temporary center seat.




                        1  Handrail
                        2  Front port seat (rear)
                        3  Front port seat (front)
                        4  Front starboard seat (front)                                     1
                        5  Front starboard seat (rear)
                        Two bow filler cushions are provided for use
                        while the boat is not being operated.
                                                              1  Bow filler cushion
                        These cushions can be used to make a large
                        flat area in the bow for use as a sundeck.
                        To remove or install the bow filler cushions,
                        lift up the front seats (rear).
                             WARNING
                         Do not use the bow filler cushions while
                          the boat is underway.  A passenger
                          could lose balance and fall on the deck
                          or overboard, causing injury or death.
                         Stow the cushions securely before oper-
                          ating the boat. A loose cushion could be
                          blown by the wind, distracting the oper-




                        98]]></page><page Index="107"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 99  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                                              (2) Rotate the lever to port (left).







                                                      5
                                      2    3
                                              4
                                     1
                        1  Rear starboard seat
                        2  Starboard engine hood seat         (3) Move  the seat to  the desired  position,
                        3  Port engine hood seat                 and then release the lever.
                        4  Rear port seat
                                                              (4) Push the lever to its original position.
                        5  Handgrip
                                                              To swivel the seat:
                                                              (1) Extend the slide/swivel lock lever.
                        Driver’s seat
                                                              (2) Rotate the lever to starboard (right).
                        The driver’s seat can slide forward and rear-
                        ward, and the seat can swivel, and the back-
                        rest angle can be adjusted. In addition, the
                        seat bolster at the front of the seat can be
                        flipped up to change the seat style for a
                        raised seating position.
                        Make sure that the seat is securely locked in
                        place before getting underway.
                        To slide the seat:
                        (1) Extend the slide/swivel lock lever.













                                1
                        1  Slide/swivel lock lever







                                                                                               99]]></page><page Index="108"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 100  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        (3) Swivel the seat to the desired position. If  To use the armrests:
                            it is too easy or too difficult to rotate the  Lower the armrests until they stop.
                            seat, adjust the swivel friction by turning
                            the swivel friction knob in or out.







                                                                                          1



                                                1             1  Armrest

                        1  Swivel friction knob               To adjust the backrest angle:
                                                              While lifting the adjusting lever on the star-
                        (4) Push the lever to its original position.  board side of the seat, move the backrest to
                        To flip up the seat bolster:          the desired position.
                        Lift up the seat bolster at the front of the seat
                        so that it is resting against the backrest.










                                                                                              1
                             1                                1  Adjusting lever

                        1  Seat bolster                       TIP:
                                                              Depending on the direction and position of
                                                              the seat, it may not be possible to adjust the
                                                              backrest angle.













                        100]]></page><page Index="109"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 101  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        Passenger’s seat
                                                                  WARNING
                        The passenger’s seat can be adjusted in the
                        same ways as the driver’s seat.       Do  not sit on the swim  platform seats
                        See “Driver’s seat” for instructions on adjust-  while the  engines are  running. Exhaust
                        ing the seat. However, the seat bolster of the  gases coming from underneath the swim
                        passenger’s seat cannot be adjusted.  platform contain carbon monoxide, a col-
                                                              orless, odorless gas which may cause
                                                              brain damage or death when inhaled.
                                              1
                                                              When the backrests are toward the stern, the
                                                              center seat and the removable backrest can
                                                              be installed.



                                                                                    1


                        1  Passenger’s seat                                          2
                        Engine hood seat
                        The position of the backrest for the engine
                        hood seats  can  be changed by pulling the
                        lock lever  toward the bow or toward the
                                                              1  Backrest
                        stern.
                                                              2  Center seat
                                           1
                                                              The center seat can also be installed upside
                                                              down to use as a beverage holder.
                                                              Swim platform seat
                                                              (252S / 252SE / 252SD)
                                        2                     The swim platform seats are provided on the
                                                              swim platform. WARNING! Do not sit on the
                                                              swim platform seats while the engines are
                                                              running. Exhaust gases coming from un-
                        1  Backrest                           derneath the swim platform contain car-
                        2  Lock lever                         bon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas
                                                              which may cause brain damage or death
                        By moving the backrest toward the bow, the  when inhaled.
                        seating area of the swim platform seats can
                        be increased, and by moving the backrest to
                        the stern, a seating space for the cabin area
                        can be created.


                                                                                             101]]></page><page Index="110"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 102  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                                                              To install an underwater seat, fit the seat pole
                                        1                     into the  seat  bracket,  and then secure the
                                                              pole by inserting the lock pin.








                                                                                          2

                        1  Swim platform seat
                                                                    1       3
                        Underwater seats
                        The underwater seats can be used to sit in  1  Seat bracket
                        the water  while  the boat is  moored or an-  2  Seat pole
                        chored.                               3  Lock pin
                        Remove the seats  before starting the en-
                        gines,  and install  the seats only  when the  TIP:
                        boat is stopped and the engines are not run-   The underwater seats can also be installed
                        ning.                                  upside down to use as beverage holders.
                                                               The underwater seats will float if acciden-
                             WARNING
                                                               tally dropped into the water.
                        Do not sit on the underwater seats while
                        the engines  are running.  Exhaust gases
                        coming from underneath the swim plat-
                        form contain carbon monoxide, a color-
                        less, odorless gas which may cause brain
                        damage or death when inhaled.












                                              1


                        1  Underwater seat




                        102]]></page><page Index="111"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 103  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                   Engine hood                    Storage compartments
                         NOTICE                               This boat is equipped with the following con-
                                                              venient on-board storage compartments.
                        When opening the engine hood, keep the  Make sure  that the storage  compartments
                        backrest in the rear position. If the back-  are securely closed before getting underway.
                        rest is in the forward position, the engine
                        hood may fall, resulting in injury.   Anchor storage compartment
                                                              The anchor storage compartment is located
                        The engine hood can be opened to access
                                                              at the bow.
                        the engines.
                                                              To open the anchor storage compartment:
                        The engine hood latch is located under the
                                                              Pull the anchor storage compartment lid latch
                        front of each engine hood seat.
                                                              to open the lid.
                        To prevent excess water from spilling onto
                        the engines after a rainfall or washing down
                        the boat, wipe off the seat cushions before                          1
                        opening the engine hood.
                        To open the engine hood, pull the engine
                        hood latch up and lift the engine hood.
                                                                  2






                                                              1  Anchor storage compartment lid
                           1                                  2  Anchor storage compartment lid latch


                                                     2
                        1  Engine hood
                        2  Engine hood latch
                        To close the engine hood, push the front of                       1
                        each engine hood seat down to securely lock
                        it in place.

                                                              1  Anchor storage compartment

                                                              When storing the anchor, place some cush-
                                                              ioning material or the anchor line under the
                                                              anchor.





                                                                                             103]]></page><page Index="112"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 104  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        To close the anchor storage compartment:  Ski locker
                        Close the  anchor  storage compartment lid,  NOTICE
                        and then push it to securely lock it in place.
                                                              252XE: This storage compartment con-
                        Front underseat storage               tains a  ballast  bag. Do not store sharp
                        compartments                          items in this storage compartment to pre-
                        The front underseat storage compartment  vent the ballast bag from being punctured.
                        (starboard) and front underseat storage com-
                                                              The ski locker is located under the floor.
                        partment (port) are located  under  the front
                                                              To open the ski locker:
                        starboard seat and front port seat respective-
                                                              (1) Pull the lock handle up.
                        ly.
                                                              (2) Turn the lock handle clockwise, and then
                        To open a front underseat storage compart-
                                                                 open the ski locker lid.
                        ment, lift the front seat (rear) up.
                                                                1






                                                                                               2
                                                 1

                                                              1  Lock handle
                        1  Front starboard seat (rear)
                                                              2  Ski locker lid








                                                                                         1

                             1


                        1  Front underseat storage compartment
                                                              1  Ski locker
                        To close a front underseat storage compart-  To close the ski locker:
                        ment, lower the front seat (rear).    (1) Close the ski locker lid.





                        104]]></page><page Index="113"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 105  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        (2) Turn the lock  handle counterclockwise  Rear underseat storage compartment
                            and make  sure that  the lid is  securely  (starboard)
                            closed.                           NOTICE
                        (3) Push the lock handle down.
                        To drain water from the ski locker:   252XE: This storage compartment con-
                        (1) Remove the drain plug on the bottom of  tains a ballast tank. Be careful not to store
                            the ski locker to drain the water.  items in this area that could be crushed or
                                                              might damage the ballast tank.
                                                              The rear underseat  storage compartment
                                                              (starboard) is located  under  the rear star-
                                                              board seat.
                                                              To open the rear underseat storage compart-
                                                              ment (starboard), lift the rear starboard seat
                                                              up.
                                             1


                                                                                            1
                        1  Drain plug

                        (2) Securely install the drain plug in its origi-
                            nal position.




                                                              1  Rear starboard seat





                                                                                1










                                                              1  Rear underseat storage compartment (star-
                                                                board)






                                                                                             105]]></page><page Index="114"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 106  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        To close the rear underseat storage compart-  To close the rear underseat storage compart-
                        ment (starboard), lower the rear starboard  ment (port), lower the rear starboard seat.
                        seat.
                                                              Enclosed head compartment
                        Rear underseat storage compartment    The port console has a large compartment
                        (port)                                suitable for use  as an  on-board  changing
                         NOTICE                               room and can also accommodate a portable
                                                              toilet (not  included).  WARNING! Carbon
                        252XE: This storage compartment con-  monoxide (CO) can cause brain damage
                        tains a ballast tank. Be careful not to store  or death. Carbon monoxide can be pres-
                        items in this area that could be crushed or  ent in this compartment. Signs of carbon
                        might damage the ballast tank.        monoxide  poisoning include nausea,
                                                              headache,  dizziness, drowsiness, and
                        The rear underseat storage compartment
                                                              lack of consciousness. Get fresh air if any-
                        (port) is located under the rear port seat.
                                                              one shows signs of carbon monoxide poi-
                        To open the rear underseat storage compart-
                                                              soning.
                        ment (port), lift the rear port seat up.
                                                              To open the enclosed head compartment:
                                                              (1) Pull the lock handle out.
                                                              (2) Turn the lock handle clockwise, and then
                           1                                     open the enclosed head  compartment
                                                                 door.







                                                                      1
                        1  Rear port seat

                                                                                           2

                                                              1  Lock handle
                                                1             2  Enclosed head compartment door









                        1  Rear underseat storage compartment (port)




                        106]]></page><page Index="115"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 107  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                                              Driver’s side console compartment
                                                              The driver’s side console compartment is lo-
                                                              cated in front of the helm.
                                                              The driver’s side console compartment door
                                                              can be used as a partition in the front walk-
                                                              through.
                                                              To open the driver’s side console compart-
                                                              ment, unhook the driver’s side console com-
                                            1                 partment door latch.


                        1  Enclosed head compartment

                        There is the head compartment light in the
                        enclosed head compartment. To turn on the                      1
                        light, turn the head compartment light switch
                        to on position. To turn off the light, turn the
                        light switch to off position. NOTICE: Be sure                  2
                        the head compartment light is turned off
                        when no one is in the enclosed head com-
                        partment. Leaving the light on can  drain  1  Driver’s side console compartment door
                        the battery.                          2  Driver’s side console compartment door latch


                                                 1
                                                 2
                                                                                       1







                        1  Head compartment light switch
                        2  Head compartment light             1  Driver’s side console compartment

                        To close the enclosed head compartment:  To close the driver’s side console compart-
                        (1) Close  the enclosed head compartment  ment, close the  driver’s side console com-
                            door.                             partment  door, and then hook the latch to
                        (2) Turn the lock  handle counterclockwise  securely lock it in place.
                            and make sure that the door is securely
                            closed.
                        (3) Push the lock handle in.


                                                                                             107]]></page><page Index="116"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 108  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        To  use the driver’s side console compart-
                        ment door as the partition:
                        (1) Unfold the door and guide the edge of it
                            into the channel on  the enclosed head
                            compartment.                                                  1


                                                       1


                                                       2
                                                              1  Stowable table





                        1  Edge
                        2  Channel
                        (2) To hold the door in place, hook the driv-
                            er’s side console compartment door                           1
                            latch to the metal tab on the front side of
                            the door.
                                                              1  Stowable table

                                                                Maximum weight limit:
                                                       2          9 kg (20 lb)
                                                              To stow the stowable table, lift the table and
                                                              place it in its original position.

                              1                               Glove compartment
                                                              The glove compartment is located in front of
                        1  Driver’s side console compartment door latch  the passenger’s seat.
                        2  Metal tab                          To open the glove compartment:
                                                              While pulling the glove compartment latch,
                        Stowable table                        pull the glove compartment lid to open it.
                        The stowable table is located in front of the
                        passenger’s seat.
                        To use the stowable table, pull the table and
                        lower it until it contacts the stoppers.




                        108]]></page><page Index="117"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 109  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation


                                                        2


                                                                                            2
                                                               1




                                                   1
                                                               3

                        1  Glove compartment lid              1  Galley storage compartment lid
                        2  Glove compartment latch            2  Galley storage compartment lid latch
                                                              3  Cooler box
                                                              To close the galley storage compartment:
                                                              Close the galley storage compartment lid,
                                                              and then push it to securely lock it in place.
                                                    1
                                                              To extend the galley table:
                                                              (1) Open the cushion at the rear of the gal-
                                                                 ley, and lift up the galley table.



                        1  Glove compartment

                        To close the glove compartment:
                        Close the glove compartment lid, and  then
                        push it to securely lock it in place.          1

                        Galley storage compartment (252S /
                        252SE / 252XE / 252SD)
                        The galley storage compartment is located to  1  Galley table
                        the rearward of the driver’s seat.
                        There are a cooler box under the galley stor-  (2) Align the edge of the cushion with the
                        age compartment.                         groove on the galley table.
                        To open the galley storage compartment:
                        Pull the galley storage compartment lid latch
                        to open the lid.







                                                                                             109]]></page><page Index="118"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 110  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation















                                                                                              1
                                                              1  Wet storage compartment
                        To fold the galley table:
                        When installing the engine cover, simply re-  To close the wet storage compartment:
                        verse the steps for extension.        (1) Close the rear platform hatch.
                                                              (2) Turn the lock handles counterclockwise
                        Wet storage compartment                  and make sure that the hatch is securely
                        The wet storage compartment is located un-  closed.
                        der the swim platform.                (3) Push the lock handles down.
                        To open the wet storage compartment:  TIP:
                        (1) Pull the lock handles up.          The engines will not start if the rear plat-
                        TIP:                                   form hatch is not securely closed.
                        252S / 252SE / 252SD: The lock handles are   252S / 252SE / 252SD: Snap the buttons
                        located under the swim platform seats.  on the bottom of each swim platform seat
                        (2) Turn  the lock handles  clockwise, and  onto the button bases.
                            then open the rear platform hatch.
                                                              Stern storage compartments
                                                1             The stern storage compartments are located
                                                              behind the swim platform seat backrests.
                                                              To open a stern storage compartment, pull
                                                              the strap on the swim platform seat backrest.


                                                2




                        1  Rear platform hatch
                        2  Lock handle








                        110]]></page><page Index="119"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 111  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                                                        Walk-through
                                         1
                                                              Front walk-through
                                                              This boat has  a large  bow area where  two
                                                              adults can sit comfortably with their legs out-
                                                       2
                                                              stretched. The front  walk-through provides
                                                              easy access to the bow area from the cabin
                                                              area.

                                                                   1

                        1  Swim platform seat backrest
                        2  Strap








                                                              1  Front walk-through
                                                              Rear walk-through
                                                              The rear walk-through has a flat design so
                                                              that persons can easily board the boat from
                                              1
                                                              the stern area and access the stern area from
                        1  Stern storage compartment (starboard)  the cabin area.

                        To  close the stern storage compartment,                   1
                        place the backrest in its original position and
                        push it to securely lock it in place.









                                                              1  Rear walk-through











                                                                                             111]]></page><page Index="120"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 112  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                                    Windshield                To adjust the mirror angle:
                        The windshield can be opened and closed.  Loosen the upper lock knob, adjust the angle
                                                              of the mirror, and then tighten the knob.
                             WARNING
                        To avoid injury, the windshield must be se-
                                                                      1
                        cured when the boat is in motion.
                        To close the windshield:
                        To  close the windshield, Close the wind-
                        shield, and then turn the windshield latches
                        to the lock position.



                                                              1  Upper lock knob

                                                              To fold the mirror:
                                1
                                                              Loosen the lower lock knob, fold the mirror,
                                                              and then tighten the knob.




                        1  Windshield latch
                                                                   1
                        To open the windshield, turn the windshield
                        latches to the unlock position, and then open
                        the windshield.

                        Folding mirror (252XE)
                        The mirror is installed on the driver’s side of
                        the windshield.                       1  Lower lock knob


                                                     1











                        1  Folding mirror



                        112]]></page><page Index="121"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 113  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                              Anchor light (AR250)                      Anchor light
                         NOTICE                               (252S / 252SE / 252XE / 252SD)
                                                              The anchor light is located at the top center of
                        Do not attach a ski rope or other tow-rope
                                                              the wakeboard tower. It is also the “all-
                        to the anchor light itself. Otherwise,  the
                                                              around” light for navigation at night or in low-
                        anchor light could be damaged.
                                                              visibility conditions. (See page 89 for informa-
                        The anchor light is located at the top center of  tion on the anchor light on.)
                        the wakeboard tower. It is also the “all-  To use the anchor light:
                        around” light for navigation at night or in low-  Pull the lock tab, raise the anchor light, and
                        visibility conditions. (See pages 63 and 89 for  then move the lock tab to its original position
                        information on the anchor light on.)  to lock the anchor light in place.


                                                         1





                                                                                      1




                        1  Anchor light                       1  Lock tab


                                                                              1












                                                              1  Anchor light

                                                              To store the anchor light:
                                                              Pull the lock tab, lower the anchor light, and
                                                              then move the lock tab to its original position
                                                              to lock the anchor light in place.





                                                                                             113]]></page><page Index="122"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 114  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                              Anchor light (SX250)            (3) Open the cap of the anchor light socket,
                        The boat is equipped with a removable an-  fit the protrusion on the anchor light into
                        chor light. It is also the “all-around” light for  the slot in the socket, and then install the
                        navigation at night or in low-visibility condi-  light into the socket.
                        tions. (See page 63 for information on the an-
                        chor light on.)
                        The anchor light is stored in the ski locker.                         3
                        To set up the anchor light:
                        (1) Open the ski locker. (See page 104.)




                                                                1                            2

                                                              1  Cap
                                                    1         2  Slot
                                                              3  Protrusion
                                                              (4) Fit the anchor light stopper into the an-
                                                                 chor light socket.
                        1  Ski locker
                        (2) Remove the anchor light from the anchor
                            light holder.                                                     1







                                  1
                                                  2
                                                              1  Anchor light stopper
                                                              To store the anchor light:
                                                              (1) Pull the anchor light stopper upward, re-
                        1  Anchor light holder
                                                                 move the anchor light, and then close the
                        2  Anchor light
                                                                 cap of the anchor light socket.
                                                              (2) Install the  anchor light into  the anchor
                                                                 light holder, and then close the ski lock-
                                                                 er.






                        114]]></page><page Index="123"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 115  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                   Bow ladder                 To stow the bow ladder:
                        The bow ladder is located in the anchor stor-  (1) Open the anchor storage compartment
                        age compartment.                         lid.
                                                              (2) Raise the bow ladder, and then collapse
                                                                 it.
                                                              (3) Lower the bow ladder into the  anchor
                             2                                   storage compartment, and then slide it
                                                   1             rearward completely.
                                                              (4) Close the anchor storage compartment
                                                     3           lid.





                        1  Bow ladder
                        2  Bow ladder strap
                        3  Anchor storage compartment

                        To use the bow ladder:
                        (1) Open the anchor storage compartment
                            lid. (See page 103.)
                        (2) Slide the bow ladder toward the bow.
                        (3) Extend the bow ladder, and then flip the
                            ladder forward and lower it.
                        (4) Close the anchor storage compartment
                            lid to use it as a step.





                                                      1








                        1  Bow ladder









                                                                                             115]]></page><page Index="124"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 116  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                                  Swim platform

                             WARNING
                        Stay away from the swim  platform  area
                        while the engines are  running. Exhaust
                        gases coming from underneath it contain
                        carbon monoxide, a  colorless, odorless
                        gas which may cause brain  damage or                        1
                        death when inhaled. Symptoms  include
                        nausea, dizziness, and drowsiness.
                        The swim platform area provides a place to  1  Stern ladder
                        stand or sit while putting on skis or a wake-
                                                              (2) Pull the stern ladder out completely, and
                        board, and includes a stern ladder to make
                                                                 then lower it.
                        boarding from the water easier.

                                                       1










                                                              To stow the stern ladder:
                        1  Swim platform
                                                              (1) Raise the stern ladder until it is horizon-
                        Stern ladder                             tal, and then push it forward completely.
                        The stern ladder is stored under  the swim  (2) Push the end of the stern ladder to fit it
                        platform.                                onto the hooks on the boat.
                        To use the stern ladder:
                        (1) Lift the end of the stern ladder to release
                            it from the hooks on the boat.







                                                                             1

                                                              1  Hook



                        116]]></page><page Index="125"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 117  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        Swim platform shower (252S / 252SE /
                        252SD)
                                                                                         1
                             WARNING
                         Do not drink water from the shower han-
                          dle. Water in the shower tank is non-po-
                          table.
                         Do not use the  swim  platform  shower
                          when  the boat is  moving. Otherwise,
                          falling overboard may cause injury or
                          death.
                                                              1  Filler fitting cap
                         NOTICE
                                                              (3) Connect a standard garden hose to the
                         Clean the shower handle and hose with  filler fitting.
                          mild soap and water only. Never use sol-  (4) The tank is completely full when water
                          vent-based cleaners on the shower han-  flows out from the overflow vent on the
                          dle or hose.                           starboard side of the boat.
                         Drain the storage tank to less than half
                                                                Shower tank capacity:
                          full if the boat is to be stored or used in
                                                                  37.8 L (10.0 US gal, 8.3 Imp.gal)
                          freezing weather. Freezing  water  can
                          damage the tank.
                        The swim platform shower is located on the
                        swim platform.

                                                                                     1

                                                        1



                                                              1  Overflow vent

                                                              (5) Disconnect the garden hose from the fill-
                                                                 er fitting.
                        1  Swim platform shower cover
                                                              (6) Install the filler fitting cap securely.
                                                              (7) Close the rear platform hatch.
                        To fill the shower tank:
                        (1) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                            110.)
                        (2) Remove the filler fitting cap.




                                                                                             117]]></page><page Index="126"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 118  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        To use the shower:
                        (1) Tap the “Shower” button to select the
                            “Shower” button on the system control
                            screen to turn the shower pump on.
                                                                    2
                                                                                      1







                                                              1  Swim platform shower handle
                             Shower  Tower  Courtesy  Dock    2  Flow control button

                                1                             TIP:
                                                              The  shower can  provide up to 5.3 L
                        1  “Shower” button
                                                              (1.4 US gal,  1.2 Imp.gal) per minute  flow
                        (2) Open the swim platform shower cover.  through the retractable shower handle.

                                                              (4) Feed the shower handle hose back into
                                                                 the opening and place the swim platform
                                                                 shower handle in its cradle.
                                                        1
                                                              (5) Close the swim platform shower cover.
                                                              (6) Tap  the “Shower” button to select  the
                                                                 “Shower” button on the system control
                                                                 screen to turn the shower pump off.



                        1  Swim platform shower cover

                        (3) Lift the swim platform shower handle
                            and push the flow control button to dis-
                            charge water.
















                        118]]></page><page Index="127"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 119  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                             Remote control keypad            Side table
                        The remote control keypad is located on the  WARNING
                        starboard side of the swim platform.
                                                              If the side table is installed at the swim
                        For operating instructions, refer to the stereo
                                                              platform, do not use the table while the en-
                        system owner’s manual included with your
                                                              gines are running. Exhaust gases coming
                        boat.
                                                              from underneath the swim platform con-
                                                              tain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odor-
                                                       1      less gas which may cause brain damage
                                                              or death when inhaled. Symptoms include
                                                              nausea, dizziness, and drowsiness.

                                                              NOTICE
                                                              If the side table is installed at the swim
                                                              platform, remove the side table before op-
                                                              erating the boat. Otherwise, the side table
                                                              may fall into the water.
                        1  Remote control keypad
                                                              The side table can be installed at the swim
                                                              platform.




                                                                   1








                                                              1  Side table

                                                              AR250 / SX250: This model can also be in-
                                                              stalled to the rearward of the driver’s seat.













                                                                                             119]]></page><page Index="128"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 120  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                                                                       USB chargers
                                                        1
                                                              There are the USB chargers on the deck. The
                                                              USB charger can be used to charge external
                                                              devices.







                                                                                     1
                        1  Side table
                                                                                    5V
                        To install the side table, slide the end of the
                        table pole into  the table bracket until it is
                        locked in place.
                                                              1  USB charger










                          3
                                                  2             1
                                        1

                        1  Table bracket
                        2  Table pole
                                                              1  USB charger
                        3  Table bracket knob
                        To remove the side table, pull the table brack-
                        et knob, and then pull the table pole upward.


















                        120]]></page><page Index="129"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 121  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                Wakeboard tower               NOTICE
                                (except for SX250)
                                                              Do not modify the wakeboard tower to tow
                        The wakeboard tower is provided as an ele-
                                                              from it or to carry accessories not de-
                        vated tow point suitable for wakeboards and
                                                              signed for it. The wakeboard tower could
                        similar towable recreational equipment. The
                                                              be damaged. Also, the wakeboard tower
                        tow pylon can be used to attach a standard
                                                              collapsing feature is intended for storage
                        ski rope or other tow-rope.
                                                              only. The boat should not be transported
                                                              or  operated with  the tower in  the col-
                                                              lapsed position.
                                                              Collapsing and setting up the
                                                              wakeboard tower
                                                              (AR250 / 252S / 252XE)
                                                              When  storing the boat,  collapse the  wake-
                                                              board tower.
                                                              NOTICE

                                                               Accidentally  dropping the wakeboard
                             WARNING                           tower while collapsing or raising it can
                                                               damage the tower, the boat, or both. An
                        Severe injury or death can result if you ig-
                                                               assistant needs to help hold the wake-
                        nore any of the following:
                                                               board tower in place during the proce-
                         Maximum towing capacity:
                                                               dure.
                          1 Person, 158 kg (350 lb) max.
                                                               Do not operate the boat or transport it
                         Make sure the tow-rope is securely fas-
                                                               on the trailer with the tower in the col-
                          tened to  the  tow  pylon on the wake-
                                                               lapsed position to avoid possible dam-
                          board tower.
                                                               age.
                         Do  not  tow a tube or other inflatable
                          from the wakeboard tower. Use the ski
                          tow hook on the transom.
                         Stay clear of the tow-rope while pulling
                          a wakeboard rider or skier.
                         Do not climb, hang, or sit on the wake-
                          board tower.
                         Make sure all knobs or pins securing the
                          wakeboard tower are tightened  before
                          operation and check periodically during
                          use.






                                                                                             121]]></page><page Index="130"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 122  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        To collapse the wakeboard tower:      Collapsing and setting up the
                        (1) 252XE: Fold the mirror. (See page 112 for  wakeboard tower (252SE / 252SD)
                            information on folding the mirror.)  When  storing the boat,  collapse the  wake-
                        (2) While an assistant supports the wake-  board tower.
                            board tower, completely loosen the lock  NOTICE
                            knobs on both sides of the wakeboard
                            tower.                             Accidentally dropping the  upper tower
                                                               section while collapsing or raising it can
                                                               damage the tower, the boat, or both. As-
                                               1
                                                      2        sistants need to support the upper tow-
                                                               er section during the procedure.
                                                               Do not operate the boat or transport it
                                                               on the trailer with the tower in the col-
                                                               lapsed position to avoid possible dam-
                                                               age.
                                                              To collapse the wakeboard tower:
                                                              (1) Remove the lock knob securing the bimi-
                        1  Wakeboard tower                       ni top to the wakeboard tower.
                        2  Lock knob
                        (3) Lower the wakeboard tower until it
                            stops.

                                                                                               1






                                                              1  Lock knob

                                                              (2) While assistants  support the wake-
                                                                 board tower and bimini top, hold down
                                                                 the lock lever and remove the latch on
                        To set up the wakeboard tower:           both sides of the wakeboard tower.
                        (1) Lift the wakeboard tower.
                        (2) While an assistant supports the wake-
                            board tower, tighten the lock knobs on
                            both sides of the wakeboard tower until
                            they stop.





                        122]]></page><page Index="131"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 123  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                                                          Bimini top
                                1
                                                                   (AR250 / 252S / 252XE)
                                                              Setting up the bimini top
                                                              To set up the bimini top:
                               2                              (1) Remove the storage cover, and then un-
                                                                 wrap the bimini top.

                                                                          1



                        1  Lock lever
                        2  Latch

                        (3) Lower the wakeboard tower until it
                            stops.
                        To set up the wakeboard tower:
                        (1) Lift the wakeboard tower.
                                                              1  Storage cover
                        (2) While assistants support the  wake-
                            board tower and bimini top, install the
                                                              (2) Pull the front of the bimini top toward the
                            latch on both sides of the wakeboard
                                                                 bow, and then open the flap and pull out
                            tower.
                                                                 the front support poles from the bimini
                                                                 top.

                                                                                  1
                                  1






                                                                                     2
                        1  Latch

                                                              1  Front support pole
                        (3) Tighten the lock knob to secure the bimi-
                                                              2  Flap
                            ni top to the wakeboard tower.










                                                                                             123]]></page><page Index="132"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 124  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        (3) Insert the front support poles  into the  (5) Push the snap button and extend each
                            mounting holes in the wakeboard tower.  rear support pole to the long position.

                                                2
                                                                    1
                                                                    2

                                                                    3
                           1
                                                                    4
                                                                    5



                        1  Mounting hole                      1  Rear support pole
                        2  Front support pole                 2  Snap button
                                                              3  Short position
                        (4) Pull the rear of the bimini top toward the  4  Middle position
                            stern, and then unhook the rear support  5  Long position
                            poles from the main pole.
                                                              (6) Secure each rear support pole to the rear
                                                                 support pole mounting bracket using the
                                                                 lock pin.
                                              2                                         1



                                                                            2         3

                                        1

                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Main pole

                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Lock pin
                                                              3  Rear support pole mounting bracket













                        124]]></page><page Index="133"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 125  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        (7) While pulling the main pole down, push  Storing the bimini top
                            the snap button and shorten each rear  To store the bimini top:
                            support pole to either the middle position  (1) While pulling the main pole down slightly,
                            for cruising or to the short position if you  push the snap button, and then extend
                            are using the wakeboard tower. Be sure  each rear support pole to the long posi-
                            the snap buttons click into place.   tion to loosen the bimini top.


                             1                                        1

                             2
                                                                      2
                             3
                             4                                        3




                        1  Rear support pole                  1  Rear support pole
                        2  Short position                     2  Snap button
                        3  Middle position                    3  Long position
                        4  Snap button
                                                              (2) Remove each rear support pole from the
                         NOTICE                                  rear support pole mounting bracket by
                                                                 rotating the lock pin.
                         Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) with the
                          bimini top in the up position.                                1
                         Be careful not to push the snap button
                          and extend the pole too far. Otherwise,
                          the lower section of the pole could fall          2         3
                          into the water.






                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Lock pin
                                                              3  Rear support pole mounting bracket










                                                                                             125]]></page><page Index="134"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 126  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        (3) Push the snap button and shorten each  (5) Remove the front support poles from the
                            rear support pole to the short position.  wakeboard tower, and  then  place the
                                                                 poles in the flap of the bimini top.

                                1
                                                                                     1

                                2

                                3




                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Short position                     1  Front support pole
                        3  Snap button
                                                              (6) Pull the front of the bimini top toward the
                         NOTICE                                  stern, wrap the bimini top around the
                                                                 main pole, and then install the storage
                        Be careful not to push the snap button and
                                                                 cover.
                        extend the pole too far.  Otherwise, the
                        lower section of the pole could fall into the
                                                              Trailering with the bimini top
                        water.
                                                              The bimini top must be secured to the boat
                        (4) Hook the rear  support  poles onto the  when it is being trailered. When the boat is
                            main pole, and then pull the rear of the  trailered with a genuine Yamaha boat cover,
                            bimini top toward the bow.        simply store the bimini top in the fully col-
                                                              lapsed position and install the storage cover.
                                                              If a boat cover is not used, wrap an elastic
                                                              cord around the top and secure the ends to
                                                              the tow pylon on the wakeboard tower to re-
                                              2
                                                              strict movement.
                           1
                                                              Removing the bimini top
                                                              To remove the bimini top:
                                                              (1) Store the bimini top. See “Storing the bi-
                                                                 mini top”.
                                                              (2) While supporting the bimini top, rotate
                        1  Rear support pole
                                                                 the lock pins securing the main pole to
                        2  Main pole
                                                                 the wakeboard tower, and then remove
                                                                 the top.





                        126]]></page><page Index="135"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 127  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                                                Bimini top (252SE / 252SD)
                                    1                         Removing the bimini top
                                                              To remove the bimini top:
                                                              (1) Open both flaps on each side of the bimi-
                                                                 ni top.



                            2


                        1  Bimini top
                        2  Lock pin

                        Installing the bimini top                         1
                        To install the bimini top:
                        When installing the bimini top, simply reverse
                                                              1  Flap
                        the removal steps, and then make sure that
                        the lock pins are securely installed.  (2) Loosen the ratchet, and then loosen the
                                                                 strap securing the bimini top.


                                                                         1






                                                                   2



                                                              1  Ratchet
                                                              2  Flap

                                                              (3) Open the flaps at the front and rear of the
                                                                 bimini top and release the buckles.













                                                                                             127]]></page><page Index="136"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 128  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                                                                     Bimini top (SX250)
                                                              Setting up the bimini top
                                                              To set up the bimini top:
                                              1               (1) Raise the  bimini top,  and then unhook
                                                                 the rear  support poles from the main
                                                                 pole.



                                 2

                        1  Buckle
                        2  Flap                                                  1

                        (4) Slowly pull the bimini top toward the bow
                            and remove it.

                        Installing the bimini top
                                                              1  Rear support pole
                        To install the bimini top:
                        When installing the bimini top, simply reverse  (2) Secure each rear support pole to the rear
                        the removal steps.                       support pole mounting bracket using the
                                                                 lock pin. Make sure that the tab on the
                                                                 end of the lock pin is pointing downward.



                                                                 1




                                                                     2

                                                                                  3

                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Rear support pole mounting bracket
                                                              3  Lock pin











                        128]]></page><page Index="137"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 129  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        (3) Remove the storage cover, unfold the bi-  (5) Tighten the front straps so that the top is
                            mini top, and pull it toward the bow.  snug and wrinkle free.



                                      1










                        1  Storage cover
                                                              NOTICE
                        (4) Hook the latch on each front strap onto
                            the strap eye.                    Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) with the
                                                              bimini top in the up position.

                                  1                           Storing the bimini top in the upright
                                                              position
                                                              NOTICE
                               2
                                                              Do not trailer the boat with the bimini top
                              3                               in the fully extended or upright position.
                                                              When transporting the boat, put the bimini
                                                              top in the fully collapsed position to avoid
                        1  Front strap                        damage.
                        2  Latch
                        3  Strap eye




















                                                                                             129]]></page><page Index="138"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 130  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        To store the bimini top in the upright position:  poles to the rear support pole mounting
                        (1) Loosen each front strap, and then un-  brackets, and then hook each rear sup-
                            hook the latch from the strap eye.   port pole onto the main pole.


                                   1




                                                                                          1
                                2
                              3

                        1  Front strap                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Latch
                        3  Strap eye                          (3) Install  the protective cushions around
                                                                 the poles, and then lower the bimini top
                        (2) Pull the bimini top toward the stern, and  onto the rear deck.
                            then fold it.


                                                        1                     2


                                                                     1






                                                              1  Protective cushion
                        1  Bimini top                         2  Bimini top

                        (3) Install the storage cover.        Trailering with the bimini top
                                                              The bimini top must be secured to the boat
                        Storing the bimini top in the fully   when it is being trailered. When the boat is
                        collapsed position                    trailered with a genuine Yamaha boat cover,
                        To store the bimini top in the fully collapsed  simply store the bimini top in the fully col-
                        position:                             lapsed position and install the storage cover.
                        (1) Follow the above steps for “Storing the  If a boat cover is not used, wrap an elastic
                            bimini top in the upright position”.  cord around the top and secure the ends to
                        (2) While supporting the bimini top, remove  the ski tow hook to restrict movement.
                            the lock pins securing the rear support


                        130]]></page><page Index="139"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 131  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        Removing the bimini top
                        To remove the bimini top:
                        (1) Store the bimini top. See “Storing the bi-
                            mini top in the fully collapsed position”.
                        (2) Remove the lock pins securing the bimini
                            top to the main pole mounting brackets.


                                             1











                        1  Lock pin
                        (3) Remove the bimini top from the boat.


                        Installing the bimini top
                        To install the bimini top:
                        When installing the bimini top, simply reverse
                        the removal steps, and then make sure that
                        the lock pins are securely installed.


























                                                                                             131]]></page><page Index="140"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 132  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                                Fuel requirement              ethanol content does not exceed 10% and
                        Fuel                                  the fuel meets minimum octane ratings. E-85
                                                              is a fuel blend containing 85% ethanol and
                             WARNING
                                                              therefore must not be used in this boat. All
                         Gasoline and  gasoline vapors are ex-  ethanol blends containing more than  10%
                          tremely flammable. To avoid  fires  and  ethanol can cause fuel system damage or en-
                          explosions and to reduce the risk of in-  gine performance problems.
                          jury when refueling, follow these in-  Yamaha does not recommend gasohol con-
                          structions.                         taining methanol because it can cause fuel
                         Gasoline is poisonous and can cause in-  system damage  and engine performance
                          jury or death. Handle gasoline with care.  problems.
                          Never siphon gasoline by mouth. If you  To fill the fuel tank:
                          should swallow some gasoline, inhale a  (1) Before refueling, turn off  the  engines.
                          lot of gasoline vapor, or get some gaso-  Never refuel while smoking, or while in
                          line in your eyes, see your doctor imme-  the vicinity of sparks, open  flames, or
                          diately. If gasoline spills on  your skin,  other sources of ignition.
                          wash with soap and water. If gasoline  (2) Refuel the boat in a well-ventilated area.
                          spills  on your clothing, change  your  If the boat is in the water, be sure it is se-
                          clothes.                               curely  moored to the  fueling dock. All
                                                                 passengers must be out of the boat dur-
                         NOTICE                                  ing refueling.
                                                              (3) Press the fuel tank filler cap button, and
                         Do  not  use leaded gasoline. Leaded
                                                                 then open the fuel tank filler cap.
                          gasoline can seriously damage the en-
                          gines.
                         Avoid getting water and contaminants in
                          the  fuel  tank. Contaminated fuel can
                          cause poor performance  and engine
                          damage. Use only fresh  gasoline that
                          has been stored in clean containers.
                                                                                    1
                          Recommended fuel:
                            Regular unleaded gasoline with a
                                                                                    2
                            minimum octane rating of 86
                            (Pump octane number) = (R + M)/2  1  Fuel tank filler cap
                            90 (Research octane number)       2  Fuel tank filler cap button
                                                              (4) Slowly add fuel to the fuel tank.
                        Gasohol
                                                                Fuel tank capacity:
                        There are two types of gasohol: gasohol con-
                                                                  284 L (75.0 US gal, 62.5 Imp.gal)
                        taining ethanol and that containing methanol.
                        Gasohol containing ethanol  can be  used if


                        132]]></page><page Index="141"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 133  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                        (5) Stop filling when the fuel just becomes  Engine oil requirement
                            visible in the bottom of the filler tube. Do  Engine oil
                            not “top off” the tank, because gasoline  NOTICE
                            could spill out.
                        (6) Wipe up any spilled fuel immediately.  Use only 4-stroke engine oil. Usage of 2-
                        (7) Close the fuel tank filler cap by pushing it  stroke engine oil could result in severe en-
                            until it locks in place. Make sure that the  gine damage.
                            fuel tank filler cap is securely closed.
                                                              Select an oil grade according to the average
                        Engine Med RX Fuel Additive
                        As the fuel mixture burns in your engine’s  temperatures in the area where the boat will
                                                              be used.
                        combustion chambers, carbon deposits are
                        left behind. Over time, these deposits can re-  Recommended engine oil:
                        duce performance  and even  cause engine  YAMALUBE 4W
                        damage. Marine engines tend to run at lower  Recommended engine oil type:
                        operating temperatures than other engines,  SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-
                        making them more likely to accumulate these  50
                        harmful deposits. Engine Med RX, available  Recommended engine oil grade
                        from your Yamaha Boat Dealer, is formulated  (3-star models):
                        to remove existing deposits and, when used  API SG,SH,SJ,SL
                        continuously, prevent new ones from form-  Recommended engine oil grade
                        ing, while also helping to keep fuel injectors  (4-star models):
                        and other fuel system components clean for  API SJ,SL
                        proper performance and longer engine life.
                                                              3-star models




























                                                                                             133]]></page><page Index="142"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 134  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                        4-star models                         Checking the engine oil
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Engine oil is extremely hot immediately af-
                                                              ter the engines are turned off. Coming in
                                                              contact with or getting any engine oil on
                                                              your clothes could result in burns.
                                                              NOTICE

                                                              Make sure debris and water do not enter
                                                              the oil filler hole. Debris and water in the
                        TIP:                                  engine oil can cause serious engine dam-
                        When the engine is operated at high speeds,  age.
                        some engine oil may be consumed. Be sure
                                                              To check the engine oil level:
                        to check the engine oil level.
                                                              (1) Place the boat in a precisely level posi-
                                                                 tion on land with the engine stopped. If
                        Why Yamalube
                                                                 the engine was running, allow the engine
                        YAMALUBE oil is a Genuine YAMAHA Part
                                                                 oil to settle by waiting 5 minutes or more
                        born of the engineers’ passion and belief that
                                                                 before checking the oil level.
                        engine oil is an important liquid engine com-
                                                              (2) Open the engine hood. (See page 103.)
                        ponent. We form teams of specialists in the
                                                              (3) Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
                        fields of mechanical engineering, chemistry,
                                                              3-star models
                        electronics and track testing, and have them
                        develop the engine together with the oil it will
                        use. Yamalube oils take full advantage of the
                                                                              1
                        base oil’s qualities and blend in the ideal bal-
                        ance of additives to make sure the final oil
                        clears our performance standards. Thus,
                        Yamalube mineral, semisynthetic and syn-
                        thetic oils have their own distinct characters
                        and value. Yamaha’s experience gained over
                        many years of research  and development
                        into oil since the  1960’s helps make
                                                              1  Dipstick
                        Yamalube the best choice for your Yamaha
                        engine.











                        134]]></page><page Index="143"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 135  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                        4-star models                         4-star models



                                          1
                                                                                      1
                                                                                         2







                        1  Dipstick                           1  Maximum level mark
                                                              2  Minimum level mark
                        (4) Insert the dipstick back into the dipstick
                            tube  completely. Remove the  dipstick  (5) If the engine oil  level  is  significantly
                            again and check that the engine oil level  above the maximum level mark, consult
                            is between the minimum level mark and  a Yamaha Boat Dealer. If the engine oil
                            maximum level mark.                  level is below the minimum level mark,
                        3-star models                            add engine oil.
                                                              (6) Remove the engine oil filler cap.


                                                1                                      1
                                                   2









                        1  Maximum level mark
                        2  Minimum level mark
                                                              1  Engine oil filler cap
                                                              (7) Slowly add engine oil.
                                                              (8) Wait approximately 5 minutes to allow
                                                                 the engine oil to settle, and then check
                                                                 the engine oil level again.
                                                              (9) Repeat steps 3–8 until the engine oil is at
                                                                 the proper level.
                                                              (10) Install the engine oil filler cap.
                                                              (11) Repeat the checking oil level procedure
                                                                 for the other engine.
                                                              (12) Close the engine hood.

                                                                                             135]]></page><page Index="144"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 136  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                            Draining the bilge water          Engine compartment
                         NOTICE

                         Do  not  run the engines at full throttle
                          when bilge water remains in the engine
                          compartment. The bilge water can                               1
                          splash into the engines, which can result
                          in severe damage.
                         Be sure all drain plugs are tightened be-
                          fore  operating your boat. Otherwise,
                          water may flood the boat and cause it to
                          submerge.                           1  Engine compartment drain plug
                                                              To drain the bilge water from the hull:
                        Draining the bilge water on land      Remove the  hull drain plug at  the stern  to
                        This model is equipped with multiple  drain  drain the water. Check the condition of the O-
                        plugs.                                ring on the hull drain plug, and then securely
                        Bilge water from the various compartments  install the drain plug.
                        flows through drain passages and collects in
                        the bottom of the hull. The bilge water can be
                        drained from the boat by removing the hull
                        drain plugs.

                        Ski locker




                                                                                       1

                                                              1  Hull drain plug

                                             1



                        1  Drain plug












                        136]]></page><page Index="145"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 137  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                        Draining the bilge water on water
                        This model is equipped with a self-draining
                        deck and bilge pump to drain the bilge water
                        on water.

                        Self-draining deck
                        Most water that enters the deck area drains
                        automatically out the stern through the large
                        drain hole in the deck.                                              1
                        A one-way check valve in the drain prevents
                        water from traveling back to the deck while
                                                              1  Bilge pump outlet
                        the boat is moored or moving in reverse.
                                                              TIP:
                        Bilge pump                             252S / 252SE / 252SD: The “BILGE” switch
                        Your boat is equipped with a drainage sys-
                                                               light comes on while the bilge pump is op-
                        tem that channels water that enters the boat
                                                               erating.
                        from the storage compartments to the bilge
                                                              252S
                        under the engine compartment.
                        When the “Bilge” button is tapped, the bilge
                        pump will operate.
                                                                                         1

                                    NW    N    NE
                           FUEL                        DEPTH
                           50  %       FLOAT MODE      0  Ft
                                             °F
                                       Water Temp
                             START                   HOUSE
                             11.8  V                 11.8  V
                            Bilge  Blower        Nav  Anchor  1  “BILGE” switch
                            1                                 252SE / 252SD

                        1  “Bilge” button

                                                                                         1









                                                              1  “BILGE” switch



                                                                                             137]]></page><page Index="146"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 138  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                         The bilge pump will operate every 2 min-
                          utes automatically, even if the “Bilge” but-
                          ton is not tapped.

                        Even if the “Bilge” button is not tapped to op-
                        erate the bilge pump, the bilge pump will de-
                        tect when there is excessive water in the bilge
                        and will automatically drain most of it through
                        the bilge pump outlet. This  function works
                        automatically, even if the battery switches are
                        turned to the off position.
                        TIP:
                        When the bilge pump operates automatically,
                        the bilge pump will not stop until most of the
                        bilge water is drained.










































                        138]]></page><page Index="147"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 139  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                   First-time operation

                                 Engine break-in
                         NOTICE

                        Failure to perform the engine break-in
                        could result in reduced engine life or even
                        severe engine damage.
                        The engine break-in period is essential to al-
                        low the various components of the engines to
                        wear and polish themselves to the correct
                        operating clearances. This ensures proper
                        performance and promotes longer compo-
                        nent life.
                        (1) Check the engine oil level. (See page 134
                            for information on checking  the  engine
                            oil level.)
                        (2) Launch the boat and start the engines.
                            (See page 152 for information on starting
                            the engines.)
                        (3) For the first 5 minutes, operate with the
                            engines at trolling speed.
                        (4) For the next 30 minutes, operate with the
                            engines speed below 5000 r/min.
                        (5) For the next 1 hour, operate with the en-
                            gines speed below 6000 r/min.
                        After the engine break-in is complete, the
                        boat can be operated normally.
























                                                                                             139]]></page><page Index="148"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 140  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Pre-operation checks


                             WARNING
                        Failure to inspect or maintain the boat properly increases the possibility of an accident
                        or damage to the boat. Do not operate the boat if you find any problem.
                        If a problem cannot be corrected by the procedures provided in this manual, have the
                        boat inspected by a Yamaha Boat Dealer.

                        Pre-operation checklist
                        Before operating this boat, perform the checks in the following checklist. Always follow the inspec-
                        tion and maintenance procedures and schedules described in this owner’s/operator’s manual.
                        Pre-operation checks should be made each time the boat is used. These checks can be com-
                        pleted in a short time. It is worth the time spent to ensure safety and reliability.
                                 ITEM                          CHECK                     PAGE
                         PRE-LAUNCH CHECKS
                         Steering system       Check for proper steering operation.       141
                         Remote control levers  Check for proper throttle operation.      141
                                               Check for proper shift operation.
                         Throttle/shift paddles   Check for proper operation.             142
                         (252SD)
                         Fire extinguisher     Check readiness of the extinguisher.       142
                         Hull                  Check hull for damage and cracks before launching.  —
                         Access port caps      Check for proper installation.             144
                         Jet intakes           Check that no debris is in the intakes before launching.  144
                         Fuel system           Check fuel system for leaks.               144
                         Engine oil level      Check engine oil level; add as necessary.  134
                         Batteries             Check battery condition, mounting, and connection.  146
                         Bilge water           Check the engine compartment for bilge water.  146
                         Drain plug            Check the drain plug for damage and foreign material   146
                                               and check that they are securely installed.
                         Engine compartment and   Open the engine hood and check to be sure no gasoline,   147
                         blowers               gasoline vapors, or loose electrical connections are
                                               present. Operate the blowers for at least 4 minutes.
                         Engine hood           Check that the hood latch is secure.       103
                         Lights and horn       Check lights to be sure they operate. Push the horn but-  148, 149
                                               ton to be sure it operates.
                         Bimini top            Check that the top is secure.          123, 127, 128
                         Engine shut-off cord (lan-  Check the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) for damage.  150
                         yard)
                         Collapsible tower fasteners  Check that the tower fasteners are secured.  121, 122
                         (except for SX250)
                         POST-LAUNCH CHECKS
                         Switches              Check operation of the main switches and engine shut-  150
                                               off switch.
                         Cooling water pilot outlets  Check that water comes out while the engines are running.  151
                         Fuel level            Check fuel level; add as necessary.        151
                        The steering and shifting pre-operation checks will require two persons: one person to oper-
                        ate the controls and one person to observe the proper operation at the stern.
                        140]]></page><page Index="149"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 141  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                           Pre-operation check points
                        Pre-launch checks
                        Perform the pre-launch checks in the pre-op-
                        eration checklist while the boat is on land.

                        Steering system checks
                        Make sure the steering wheel is not loose.
                        There should not be any free play, either in-                    1
                                                                   1
                        and-out or in rotation. Turn the steering wheel             2
                        fully to the right and left to make sure opera-
                        tion is smooth  and unrestricted throughout  1  Jet thrust nozzle
                        the whole range.                      2  Articulating keel

                                                              Remote control lever checks
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Do not touch the shift gates while the re-
                                                              mote control levers are being operated,
                                                              otherwise, you could be pinched.
                                                              Operate the remote control levers several
                                          1                   times to make sure that operation is smooth

                                                              throughout the whole range.
                        1  Steering wheel
                                                                              N
                        Make sure both jet thrust nozzles change di-  F 3  2  5  1  5   4 R
                        rections as the steering wheel is turned. The
                        jet thrust nozzles should point to starboard  7                     7
                        (right) when the wheel is turned to the right.      6     6
                        The jet thrust  nozzles should point to port  8                       8
                        (left) when the wheel is turned to the left.
                        There should not be free play between the
                        steering wheel and the jet thrust nozzles. In
                        addition, check that the direction of the artic-
                                                              1  Neutral position
                        ulating keel changes according to the move-  2  TDE position
                        ment of the jet thrust nozzles.       3  Forward position
                                                              4  Reverse position
                                                              5  Shift
                                                              6  Fully closed
                                                              7  Throttle
                                                              8  Fully open




                                                                                             141]]></page><page Index="150"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 142  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        252SE / 252XE: Start the engines before per-  Throttle/shift paddle checks (252SD)
                        forming the following checks. NOTICE: Do  Operate  the throttle/shift paddles several
                        not run the engines  over 4000  r/min on  times to make sure that operation is smooth
                        land. Also, do not run the engines for more  throughout the whole range. Also, make sure
                        than 15 seconds without supplying water,  that the throttle/shift paddles return automat-
                        otherwise, the  engines could overheat  ically to  their original positions  when re-
                        and/or seize.                         leased.
                        Check that the shift gates are slightly above
                        the shift gate neutral position when the re-   1
                        mote control levers are in the forward posi-
                        tion, and that the shift gates are in the fully
                        open position when the remote control levers
                        are moved farther forward.
                        Fully open position
                          1
                                                                       1
                                                              1  Throttle/shift paddle

                          2                                   Fire extinguisher check
                                                              As an inboard boat less than 26 feet in length,
                                                              your boat must be fitted with one 5-B (B-1)
                                                              type fire extinguisher when navigating waters
                                                              controlled by the U.S. Coast Guard. In addi-
                        1  Shift gate                         tion, most state and local boating laws re-
                        2  Jet thrust nozzle                  quire that the craft carry a USCG-approved
                                                              fire extinguisher whenever the boat is operat-
                        Check that the shift gates are in the fully
                                                              ed.
                        closed position when the remote control le-
                                                              Make sure at least one fire extinguisher is
                        vers are in the reverse position.
                                                              aboard and full; two fire extinguishers are
                        Fully closed position
                                                              recommended. See the instructions supplied
                                                              by the  extinguisher manufacturer to deter-
                                                              mine the indication of the condition.
                          1
                                                              A fire extinguisher is not standard equipment
                                                              with this boat. If you do not have a fire extin-
                                                              guisher,  contact your local  Yamaha Boat
                                                              Dealer or fire extinguisher dealer for one
                                                              meeting the proper specifications.



                        1  Shift gate


                        142]]></page><page Index="151"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 143  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        Storing the fire extinguisher         type needs to be aimed directly at the base of
                        One fire extinguisher is to be mounted in the  the  flames to be  effective. See below for
                        driver’s side console compartment. The fire  FIRE-PORT™ information.
                        extinguisher recommended for this location
                        is a chemical-type extinguisher with a capac-
                        ity of two pounds or more.




                                                                                     1




                                                              1  FIRE-PORT™



                        If you choose to have two fire extinguishers,
                        the other fire extinguisher is to be mounted in
                        the rear  underseat storage  compartment
                        (port). There is a location label outside the
                        compartment. This fire extinguisher located
                        near the engine compartment  should  be a
                        “clean agent” type designed to displace oxy-
                        gen, with an inert gas, such as CO , or FE-
                                                    2
                        36™, and have a capacity of five pounds or
                        more.                                 A FIRE-PORT™ is mounted below the engine
                                                              hood. Use this port to spray the contents of a
                                                              fire extinguisher into the engine compartment
                                                              if  a fire breaks out  in  the engine area.
                                                              WARNING! If there is a fire in the engine
                                                              compartment, opening the hatch will add
                                                              more oxygen to the fire, increasing the risk
                                                              of a larger fire or an explosion.
                                                              If you see smoke or otherwise suspect a fire,
                                                              you can look through the transparent flaps of
                                                              the FIRE-PORT™ to look for signs of flames.
                                                              If there is a fire, push the nozzle of the fire ex-
                        Operating the fire extinguisher       tinguisher through the FIRE-PORT™ and fol-
                        A  chemical-type fire extinguisher may not  low the manufacturer’s instructions to empty
                        help when sprayed into the engine compart-  the contents of the fire extinguisher into the
                        ment through the FIRE-PORT™ because that  engine compartment.


                                                                                             143]]></page><page Index="152"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 144  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        A “clean agent” type fire extinguisher is rec-
                        ommended; a chemical-type fire extinguisher
                        may not be adequate in this application.

                        Access port cap check
                        Make sure that the access port caps are se-
                        curely installed.
                        To check the access port caps:                  1
                        (1) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                            110 for information on the rear platform
                            hatch.)                           1  Jet intake
                        (2) Make sure that the access port caps are
                            securely installed. If they are removed or  In some cases, the engines may overheat be-
                            are  not locked, securely install  them.  cause of a lack of cooling water, and damage
                            (See page 188 for information on the ac-  could result.  If the jet  intakes are clogged,
                            cess port caps.)                  clean them. (See page 188 for information on
                                                              the jet intakes.) WARNING! Rotating parts
                                                              could cause severe injury or death. Before
                                                              attempting to remove weeds or debris
                                                      1
                                                              from the jet intakes or impeller areas; shut
                                                              off the engines, remove the main switch
                                                              keys, and then remove the engine shut-off
                                                              cord (lanyard) from the  engine shut-off
                                                              switch.

                                                              Fuel system checks
                        1  Access port cap                    Check the fuel filler hoses and joints in the
                                                              engine compartment for damage, loose-
                        (3) Close the rear platform hatch.    ness, and signs of leaking. At least annually,
                                                              or if a problem is suspected, check the fuel
                        Jet intake checks                     tank and fuel filler hoses and clamps. Have
                        Carefully check the jet intakes under the boat  a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the fuel tank
                        for weeds, debris, or anything else that might  and fuel filler hoses and clamps. WARNING!
                        restrict the intake of water. If the intakes are  If there are signs of leaking fuel, do not
                        clogged, cavitation could occur, reducing jet  operate the boat until the source of the
                        thrust, and possibly  damaging jet pump  fuel leak is found and corrected. Gasoline
                        parts.                                and its vapors are highly flammable and
                                                              explosive.







                        144]]></page><page Index="153"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 145  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        Engine oil level check                4-star models
                        Make sure that the engine oil level is between
                        the minimum level mark and maximum level
                        mark on the dipstick. (See page 134 for infor-          1
                        mation on checking the engine oil level.)
                        3-star models


                                        1



                                                              1  Dipstick





                        1  Dipstick
                                                                                      1
                                                                                         2



                                                1
                                                   2
                                                              1  Maximum level mark
                                                              2  Minimum level mark




                        1  Maximum level mark
                        2  Minimum level mark



















                                                                                             145]]></page><page Index="154"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 146  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        Battery check                         Bilge water check
                        Make sure that the battery terminals are not  Make sure that no bilge water has collected in
                        damaged and that the battery leads are con-  the engine compartment. If bilge water has
                        nected properly.  WARNING! The  battery  collected in the engine compartment drain it.
                        must always be fully charged and in good  (See page 136 for information on draining the
                        condition. Loss of battery power may  bilge water.)
                        leave you stranded. Never  operate the
                        boat if the start battery does not have suf-  Drain plug check
                        ficient power to start the engines or if it  Loosen the drain plug and remove them, and
                        shows any other signs of decreased pow-  then make sure that the plug and the O-ring
                        er.                                   on the hull drain plug are not damaged and
                                                              that there is no foreign material on the
                                                        2
                                 2                            threads or the O-ring on the hull drain plug.
                                                              NOTICE: Before installing the drain plug,
                                                              clean the  drain plug threads and the  O-
                                                              ring on the hull drain plug to remove any
                                                              foreign materials, such as dirt or sand.
                                                              Otherwise, the drain plug could be dam-
                                                              aged, allowing water to enter the engine
                                                              compartment.  Make sure that the drain
                                                 1      1     plug is tightened securely before launch-
                                                              ing the boat. Otherwise, water may flood
                        1  Positive (+) battery terminal: Red lead
                        2  Negative (–) battery terminal: Black lead  the boat and cause it to submerge.
                                                              Securely install the drain plug by tightening it
                                                              until it stop.













                                                                                       1
                                                              1  Hull drain plug










                        146]]></page><page Index="155"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 147  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        Blower checks
                             WARNING                                     NW    N     NE
                                                                FUEL                        DEPTH
                        Gasoline vapors can explode.  Before    50  %       FLOAT MODE       0  Ft
                        starting the engines, check the engine
                                                                                   °F
                        compartment for gasoline, gasoline va-
                                                                            Water Temp
                        pors, and loose electrical connections,
                                                                  START                    HOUSE
                        and then operate the blowers for at least 4  11.8  V               11.8  V
                        minutes. Do not start the engines or oper-  Bilge  Blower      Nav  Anchor
                        ate the blowers if you can smell gasoline     1
                        vapors in the  engine compartment or if
                                                              1  “Blower” button
                        there are any loose electrical connections.
                        Contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer if there is a
                                                              252S / 252SE / 252SD
                        problem you cannot locate or correct.
                                                              To check the operation using the switch pan-
                        Make sure that the blowers operate properly.  el:
                                                              Push the “BLOWER” switch. Check that the
                                                  1           blowers operate when the switch light is on
                                                              and that the blowers stop when the switch
                                                              light is off.
                                                              252S
                         1




                                                                                          1

                        1  Blower

                        To check the operation using the multi-func-
                        tion display:
                        Tap  the “Blower” button.  Check that the
                                                              1  “BLOWER” switch
                        blowers operate when the button is blue and
                        that the blowers stop when the button is gray.















                                                                                             147]]></page><page Index="156"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 148  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        252SE / 252SD                         AR250
                                                                         2

                                                                                           1
                                                    1








                        1  “BLOWER” switch                    1  Bow light
                                                              2  Anchor light
                        Navigation and anchor lights checks
                        Make sure that the bow light and anchor light  SX250
                        operate properly.
                        The procedure for setting up the anchor light    2
                        varies according to the model. See the page
                        indicated below for your boat.                                  1
                        SX250: See page 114.
                        TIP:
                        SX250: Before operating the boat in daylight
                        hours after checking the navigation and an-
                        chor lights, store the anchor light.
                        252S / 252SE / 252XE / 252SD
                                                              1  Bow light
                                            2                 2  Anchor light

                                                        1     To check the operation using the multi-func-
                                                              tion display:
                                                              (1) Tap the “Navigation” light button on the
                                                                 system control screen. Check that the
                                                                 bow light and anchor light come on when
                                                                 the button is blue and that both lights go
                                                                 off when the button is gray.
                                                              (2) Tap the “Anchor” light button on the sys-
                        1  Bow light
                                                                 tem control screen. Check that only the
                        2  Anchor light
                                                                 anchor light comes on when the button is
                                                                 blue and that the anchor light goes off
                                                                 when the button is gray.





                        148]]></page><page Index="157"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 149  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                                                              252SE / 252SD

                                    NW    N    NE
                           FUEL                        DEPTH
                           50  %       FLOAT MODE      0  Ft
                                             °F
                                       Water Temp
                             START                   HOUSE
                             11.8  V                 11.8  V
                                                                                 1
                            Bilge  Blower        Nav  Anchor
                                                 1    2
                        1  “Navigation” light button
                        2  “Anchor” light button              1  “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                                                              Horn check
                        TIP:
                                                              Push the “HORN” switch and check that the
                        You can also tap the navigation light indicator
                                                              horn sounds.
                        and the anchor light indicator on the status
                                                              The switch light comes on while the horn is
                        indicator bar to turn the bow light and anchor
                                                              operating.
                        light on or off.
                                                              AR250 / SX250
                        252S / 252SE / 252SD
                        To check the operation using the switch pan-  1
                        el:
                        Push the “NAV LIGHTS” switch. Check that             HORN   BILGE
                        only the anchor light or both the anchor light
                        and bow light come on when the switch light
                        comes on and that both lights go off when the
                        switch light is off.
                        252S

                                                              1  “HORN” switch






                                            1




                        1  “NAV LIGHTS” switch





                                                                                             149]]></page><page Index="158"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 150  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        252S



                                         1










                        1  “HORN” switch
                                                              Post-launch checks
                                                              Perform the post-launch checks in the pre-
                        252SE / 252SD
                                                              operation checklist while  the boat  is in  the
                                                              water and the engines are running.
                                          1
                                                              Engine shut-off switch check
                                                              Check the engine shut-off switch for proper
                                                              operation.
                                                              (1) Start the engines. (See page 152 for in-
                                                                 formation on starting the engines.)
                                                              (2) Pull the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) to
                                                                 remove the clip from the engine shut-off
                                                                 switch to make sure that the engines
                        1  “HORN” switch
                                                                 stop immediately.
                        Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) check  (3) Make  sure that  the engines cannot  be
                        Make sure that the engine shut-off cord (lan-  started with the clip removed from the
                        yard) is not damaged. If the cord is damaged,  engine shut-off switch.
                        replace it.  WARNING! Never try to repair  AR250 / SX250 / 252S
                        the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) or tie it
                        together. The engine  shut-off cord (lan-
                        yard) may not pull free when the operator
                        falls off, allowing the boat to continue to                    1
                        run and cause an accident.
                                                                                2




                                                              1  Engine shut-off switch
                                                              2  Clip


                        150]]></page><page Index="159"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 151  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        252SE / 252XE / 252SD                 es. If water is not flowing out of the pilot
                                                              outlets during operation, do not continue
                                                              to run the engines. Overheating and seri-
                                                              ous damage could occur. (See “Over tem-
                                                    1
                                                              perature warning” on pages 68 and 96 for
                                                              more information.)
                                                    2
                                                              Fuel level check
                                                              Check the amount of fuel remaining in the
                                                              fuel tank using the fuel level bar graph on the
                                                              multi-function display.
                        1  Engine shut-off switch
                                                              AR250 / SX250
                        2  Clip
                        Cooling water pilot outlet check
                                                                               NW     N     NE
                        Check that water comes out from the pilot   FUEL
                        outlets while the engines are running in the  50  %       FLOAT MODE
                        water. If water is not circulating, something  1
                        may be clogging the intake grates. Refer to                       °F
                        “Jet pump clean-out procedure” on page                    Water Temp
                        188.                                          START
                                                                      11.8  V
                                                                      Bilge  Blower           Nav
                                                              1  Fuel level bar graph

                                                              252S / 252SE / 252XE / 252SD
                                                                 1


                                                                                    SE    S
                                                                FUEL
                                                                100 %
                                                                   19
                        TIP:                                              x1000 rpm
                        It  may take up to 20 seconds for water  to                      MPH
                        reach the pilot outlets when  first launching  13.0  V  9
                                                                   START
                        the boat. The amount and force of the exiting       Bilge  Blower
                        water will vary with engine speed.    1  Fuel level bar graph
                         NOTICE
                                                              Add fuel if necessary. (See page 132 for infor-
                        A continuous flow of water from the pilot  mation on filling the fuel tank.)
                        outlets shows  that water is  flowing
                        through the engine cooling water passag-



                                                                                             151]]></page><page Index="160"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 152  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Operation

                                Driving your boat             Know  and follow  U.S. Coast Guard, state,
                        Getting to know your boat             and local laws when operating your boat.
                        Operating your boat requires skills acquired  Select a wide area to learn in, where visibility
                        through practice over a period of time. Take  is good and other boat traffic is light. Keep
                        the time to learn the basic techniques well  the proper distance from other boats and ve-
                        before attempting more difficult maneuvers.  hicles.  Do not operate where people  are
                        Boating with your new boat can be a very en-  swimming.
                        joyable activity, providing you with hours of
                        pleasure. But it is essential to familiarize your-
                        self with the operation of the boat to achieve
                        the skill necessary to enjoy boating safely.
                        Before operating this boat, read this own-
                        er’s/operator’s manual, the  Operation  In-
                        struction card, and all labels on the boat. Pay
                        particular attention to the safety information
                        beginning on page 13. These  materials
                        should give you an understanding of the boat  Always attach the engine shut-off cord (lan-
                        and its operation. This boat is designed to  yard) to your PFD before operating.
                        carry one operator and up to 11 passengers.   You  and all  other passengers must always
                                                              wear a USCG-approved PFD when riding in
                          Maximum load (252XE):               the boat.
                            Total weight of cargo, operator, and   Grip the steering wheel firmly and keep both
                            passengers:                       feet on the deck when driving the boat.
                              1066 kg (2350 lb)
                            Total weight of operator and passen-  Starting the engines
                            gers:
                                                                  WARNING
                              998 kg (2200 lb)
                          Maximum load (except for 252XE):    Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                            Total weight of cargo, operator, and   nore any of the following:
                            passengers:                        Before operating your boat, become fa-
                              1180 kg (2600 lb)                miliar  with all controls. Consult a
                            Total weight of operator and passen-  Yamaha Boat Dealer about any control
                            gers:                              or function you do not fully understand.
                              998 kg (2200 lb)                 Failure to understand how the controls
                                                               work could cause  an accident or pre-
                                                               vent you from avoiding an accident.
                        Learning to operate your boat
                                                               Gasoline vapors can  explode.  Before
                        Before boating, always perform the pre-oper-
                                                               starting the engines, check the engine
                        ation checks listed on page 140. The short
                                                               compartment for gasoline, gasoline va-
                        time spent checking the boat will reward you
                                                               pors, and loose electrical connections,
                        with added safety and reliability.
                                                               and then operate the blowers for at least
                                                               4 minutes. Do not start the engines or
                        152]]></page><page Index="161"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 153  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                  Operation

                          operate the blowers if  you can  smell  drain plug and make sure that the plug is
                          gasoline vapors in the engine compart-  tightened securely  before launching the
                          ment or if there are any loose electrical  boat. Otherwise, water may flood the boat
                          connections. Contact a  Yamaha Boat  and cause it to submerge.
                          Dealer if there is a problem you cannot
                          locate or correct.
                         Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          to your PFD before operating. Failure to
                          attach the cord could  result in a run-
                          away boat if the operator is ejected.
                         Do not apply throttle when anyone is at
                          the rear of the boat. Turn the engines off
                          or keep them at idle. Water and debris
                          exiting the jet thrust nozzles can cause                     1
                          severe injury.
                                                              1  Hull drain plug
                        (1) Always make sure the boat is launched
                            and used in waters that are free from  (2) Turn the battery switch to the ON posi-
                            weeds and  debris,  and at least 90 cm  tion.
                            (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the boat.  (3) Turn the main switch keys to the on po-
                            WARNING! Never operate in water      sition to operate the blowers automati-
                            that is less than 90 cm (3 ft) deep from  cally for 5 minutes.
                            the bottom of the boat. You increase  TIP:
                            your chance of hitting an underwater  To operate the blowers manually, tap the
                            obstacle. You could be injured. Peb-  “Blower” button. Ventilate the engine com-
                            bles or sand can also be sucked into  partment for at least 4 minutes, and then tap
                            the  jet intakes,  damaging the impel-  the “Blower” button again  to turn  off the
                            lers.                             blowers.



                                                                         NW    N     NE
                                                                FUEL                        DEPTH
                                                                50  %       FLOAT MODE       0  Ft
                                                                                   °F
                                     90 cm (3 ft)
                                                                            Water Temp
                                                                  START                    HOUSE
                                                                  11.8  V                  11.8  V
                                                                  Bilge  Blower        Nav  Anchor
                                                                      1
                         NOTICE                               1  “Blower” button

                        There is a hull drain plug at the bottom of
                        the  stern. Check the O-ring on  the  hull


                                                                                             153]]></page><page Index="162"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 154  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Operation


                        TIP:                                     operator falls off, allowing the boat to
                        252S / 252SE / 252SD: You can also push the  continue to  run and cause an  acci-
                        “BLOWER” switch  to ventilate the engine  dent.
                        compartment.                          AR250 / SX250 / 252S

                        252S                                               1
                                                                     2

                                                                                    3

                                                    1




                                                              1  Engine shut-off switch
                                                              2  Clip
                                                              3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                        1  “BLOWER” switch
                                                              252SE / 252XE / 252SD
                        252SE / 252SD


                                                                                     3
                                                    1


                                                                         1

                                                                         2

                                                              1  Engine shut-off switch
                        1  “BLOWER” switch
                                                              2  Clip
                        (4) Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard)  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                            to your PFD. Install the clip onto the en-
                                                              TIP:
                            gine shut-off switch by pushing the clip
                                                              The engines will not start when the clip is re-
                            groove over the nut beneath the knob.
                                                              moved from the engine shut-off switch.
                            Be sure the cord is not wrapped around
                                                              (5) Put the remote control levers in the neu-
                            the steering wheel or tangled in the con-
                                                                 tral position. The starter motors will not
                            trols.  WARNING! Check  that the en-
                                                                 operate unless the remote control levers
                            gine shut-off cord (lanyard) is
                                                                 are in neutral.
                            attached correctly. If the engine shut-
                                                              (6) AR250 / SX250 / 252S: Turn  the  main
                            off cord (lanyard) is not attached cor-
                                                                 switch keys to the start position and re-
                            rectly, it may not pull free when the
                        154]]></page><page Index="163"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 155  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                  Operation

                            lease them when the engines start. If the  (8) 252SE / 252XE  /  252SD: Push the
                            engines do not start after 5 seconds of  “START/STOP” buttons  and release
                            cranking, release the keys. Wait at least  them when the engines start. If the en-
                            15 seconds before trying to start the en-  gines do not  start after  5 seconds of
                            gines again.                         cranking, release the buttons. Wait at
                                                                 least 15 seconds before trying to start
                                                                 the engines again. NOTICE: If the start-
                                                                 er motors are engaged continuously
                                                                 for more than 5 seconds, the start bat-
                                      HORN
                                             BILGE
                                                                 tery will become quickly discharged
                                                                 and it will be impossible to start the
                                                                 engines. The starter motors may also
                                                                 be damaged if they are engaged con-
                                                                 tinuously for more than 5 seconds.


                         NOTICE
                         Never turn the main switch keys to the
                          start position while the engines are run-
                          ning. The starter mechanisms could be
                          damaged.
                         If the starter motors are engaged con-
                          tinuously for more than 5 seconds, the
                                                                               1
                          start battery will become quickly dis-
                          charged and it will be impossible to start  1  “START/STOP” button
                          the  engines. The starter motors may
                          also be damaged if they are engaged  On this boat, the engines are connected di-
                          continuously for more than 5 seconds.  rectly to the drive units. Starting either engine
                                                              generates some thrust immediately. Only
                        (7) 252SE / 252XE / 252SD: Turn the main
                                                              enough throttle should be applied to keep the
                            switch key to the on position.
                                                              engine at a fast enough idle to stay running.
                                                              Stopping the engines
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Once the engines have stopped, you have
                                                              NO STEERING CONTROL over the boat.
                                                              You could collide with another boat,  a
                                                              dock, or other obstacle.

                                                              Stopping the engines immediately after oper-
                                                              ating at  high engine speeds is not  recom-


                                                                                             155]]></page><page Index="164"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 156  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Operation

                        mended. Let the engines cool off at idle or  TIP:
                        low speed for a few minutes first.    The engines can also be stopped by pulling
                        To stop the engines (AR250 / SX250 / 252S):  the engine shut-off cord (lanyard).
                        (1) Return the remote control levers to the  (3) Turn the main switch key to the off posi-
                            neutral position.                    tion.
                        (2) Turn the main switch keys to the off po-
                            sition.




                                      HORN
                                             BILGE






                                                              (4) Remove the main switch key and the en-
                                                                 gine shut-off cord (lanyard) if the boat will
                        TIP:                                     be left unattended.
                        The engines can also be stopped by pulling
                        the engine shut-off cord (lanyard).   Leaving a dock
                                                              Because boats steer from the stern, the stern
                        (3) Remove the main switch keys and the  first moves in the direction opposite your de-
                            engine shut-off cord (lanyard) if the boat  sired turn. It is especially important to under-
                            will be left unattended.          stand this characteristic when leaving a dock.
                                                              If you move the remote control levers to the
                        To  stop  the engines (252SE  / 252XE /  forward position and simply turn the steering
                        252SD):                               wheel to steer the bow away from the dock,
                        (1) Return the remote control levers to the  as you would when driving a  car out of  a
                            neutral position.                 parking space, you will drive the stern of the
                        (2) Push the “START/STOP” buttons.    boat into the dock.
                                                              The  following steps are basic  maneuvering
                                                              techniques which can be used in most cir-
                                                              cumstances:
                                                              (1) With the engines idling and the bow still
                                                                 moored to the dock, turn the steering
                                                                 wheel toward the dock. Moving the re-
                                                                 mote control levers into the TDE position
                                                                 or forward position will start to move the
                                                                 stern of the boat away from the dock.
                                         1                    (2) When the stern is out a few feet, release
                                                                 the bow mooring, and then turn the
                        1  “START/STOP” button

                        156]]></page><page Index="165"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 157  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                  Operation

                            steering wheel to the center position or  B. Less throttle produces low thrust, so the
                            away from the dock. Move the remote  boat will turn more gradually.
                            control levers into  the reverse  position
                            and move away from the dock.      B

                        Turning the boat
                             WARNING
                         Do not pull the remote control levers
                          back to idle when trying to steer away
                          from objects — you need throttle to
                          steer.
                         Be sure passengers are holding on be-
                                                              C. Pulling the remote control levers back to
                          fore making turns. An unprepared pas-
                                                                 idle or the neutral position produces only
                          senger could lose balance and fall.
                                                                 minimum thrust. If you are traveling  at
                        Steering control depends on the combination  speeds above trolling, you will have rap-
                        of steering wheel position and the amount of  idly decreasing ability  to steer without
                        throttle.                                throttle. You may still have some turning
                        Water sucked in through the intake grates is  ability immediately after pulling the re-
                        pressurized by the impellers in the jet pumps.  mote control levers back to  idle, but
                        As the pressurized water is expelled from the  when the engines slow down, the boat
                        pumps through the jet thrust nozzles, it cre-  will no longer respond to steering wheel
                        ates thrust to move and steer the boat. The  input until you apply throttle again or you
                        higher the engine speed, the more thrust is  reach a trolling speed.
                        produced.                                At trolling speed, the boat can be turned
                        The amount of jet thrust, in addition to the po-  gradually by steering wheel  position
                        sition of the steering wheel, determines how  alone using just the amount of thrust
                        sharply you turn.                        available at engine idle.
                        A. More throttle produces high  thrust, so
                            the boat will turn more sharply.  C

                         A









                                                              D. If the boat is moving and the remote con-
                                                                 trol levers are in the neutral position, or if
                                                                 there is no thrust because  the engines


                                                                                             157]]></page><page Index="166"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 158  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Operation

                            are stopped, the  boat will  go  straight  Boating with passengers
                            even though the steering wheel is turned.
                                                                  WARNING
                            You need throttle to steer.
                                                              When  passengers are on board,  make
                         D                                    sure they are seated and holding onto the
                                                              handgrips, handrails, or straps before you
                                                              start  to accelerate. An  unprepared pas-
                                                              senger could lose balance and fall.
                                                              Your boat is designed for one operator and
                                                              up to 11 passengers only. Never have more
                                                              than 12 people in the boat. Passengers must
                                                              sit in one of the seats and hold onto the hand-
                                                              grips. Passengers should sit so the weight in
                                                              the boat is balanced from side-to-side and
                        Turning left                          bow-to-stern as much as possible. If the pas-
                                                              senger seat in front of the helm is used, be
                                                              sure  the operator’s  view ahead is not ob-
                                                              structed.

                                                                Maximum load (252XE):
                                                                  Total weight of cargo, operator, and
                                                                  passengers:
                                                                    1066 kg (2350 lb)
                                                                  Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                                  gers:
                                                                    998 kg (2200 lb)
                        Turning right
                                                                Maximum load (except for 252XE):
                                                                  Total weight of cargo, operator, and
                                                                  passengers:
                                                                    1180 kg (2600 lb)
                                                                  Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                                  gers:
                                                                    998 kg (2200 lb)















                        158]]></page><page Index="167"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 159  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                  Operation

                        Stopping the boat
                             WARNING

                         Allow adequate stopping distance.        123 m (403 ft)
                         Take early action to avoid collisions. Re-
                          member, boats do not have brakes.
                         Operate defensively at safe speeds and
                          keep a safe distance away from people,
                          objects, and other boats to give you time
                          to stop.
                         Do not shut the engines off when slow-
                          ing down in case you need engine power
                          to steer away from a boat or other ob-
                          stacle that comes into your path.
                         You will lose steering control if you com-
                          pletely  pull the remote control levers
                          back to idle. You need throttle to steer.
                         Do not use the reverse function to slow
                          down or stop the boat  from planing
                          speed as it could cause you to lose con-
                          trol, be ejected, or impact the steering
                          wheel or other  parts of the boat.  This
                          could increase the risk of serious injury.
                        The boat is  not equipped  with  a separate
                        braking system. It is stopped by water resis-
                        tance after the remote control levers are
                        moved back to idle. From full speed, the boat
                        stops in approximately 123 m (403 ft) after
                        the remote control levers are moved back to
                        idle. The stopping distance varies depending
                        on gross  weight,  water surface conditions,
                        and wind direction. The  stated straight-line
                        stopping distance should be used for a refer-
                        ence. The boat slows down as soon as the
                        remote control levers are returned to idle but
                        will coast for a distance before fully stopping.
                        If you are not sure you can stop in time before
                        hitting an obstacle, apply throttle and turn in
                        another direction.





                                                                                             159]]></page><page Index="168"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 160  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Operation

                        Boarding from the water               Boarding from a dock or landing jetty
                                                              (1) Board the boat from the side. One per-
                             WARNING
                                                                 son should board at a time by stepping
                        To avoid  severe injury or death, do  not  into the boat. Never jump in. Avoid step-
                        board from the rear, use swim platform, or  ping  on slick gelcoat  surfaces on the
                        swim behind boat if the engines are run-  boat’s gunwales, especially if wet.
                        ning.                                 (2) Sit in one of the seats provided and put
                         Severe internal injuries can occur if wa-  both feet on the deck.
                          ter is forced into body cavities as a re-
                          sult of being near the jet thrust nozzles.  Docking
                         Exhaust gases coming from underneath  (1) Make  sure no obstructions, boats, or
                          the swim platform contain carbon mon-  swimmers are close to the boat. Come to
                          oxide, a colorless, odorless gas which  a stop before you reach the dock.
                          may cause brain damage or death when  (2) Notice how wind and water currents are
                          inhaled. Symptoms include nausea, diz-  affecting boat movement as you attach
                          ziness, and drowsiness.                your mooring lines and fenders.
                                                              (3) Approach the dock at idle speed. Use re-
                        (1) Be sure the  engines are  off,  and then
                                                                 verse as necessary during slow-speed
                            move to the stern of the boat.
                                                                 maneuvering to help control speed and
                        (2) Pull out the stern  ladder  and  climb up
                                                                 direction. Position the boat according to
                            onto the swim platform. (See page 116
                                                                 wind and water conditions. WARNING!
                            for information on the stern ladder.)
                                                                 Do not use your hand, arm, or other
                                                                 parts of your body to try to keep the
                                                                 boat from hitting the dock. You could
                                                                 be injured if the boat pushes against
                                                                 the dock.








                        (3) Return the stern ladder to the stowed po-
                            sition, and then sit in one of the seats
                            provided.

                        Boarding from the bow
                        A bow ladder is available when boarding from
                        the bow of the boat is desired, when the boat
                        is beached. (See page 115 for bow ladder us-
                        ing procedures.)



                        160]]></page><page Index="169"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 161  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                  Operation

                        Wind or current pushing boat away from   Pull the throttle/shift paddle (right) to move
                        dock:                                 the boat forward or pull the throttle/shift pad-
                        Slowly approach the dock at about a 45° an-  dle (left) to move the boat in reverse at a slow
                        gle. Secure the bow to the dock, and then  speed and dock the boat.
                        use engine  thrust  or a boat hook to  gently
                        move the stern to the dock.
                                                                                    1
                                      Wind or current
                                                                    2







                                                              1  Throttle/shift paddle (right)
                                                              2  Throttle/shift paddle (left)
                        Wind or current pushing boat toward
                        dock:
                        Slowly maneuver to a shallow angle and al-
                        low the boat to move toward the dock.


                                 Wind or current











                        No wind or current:
                        Approach the dock at a shallow angle. Se-
                        cure the bow to the dock, and then use en-
                        gine thrust or a boat hook to gently move the
                        stern to the dock.

                        To dock using the DRiVE mode (252SD):
                        Move the remote control levers to the neutral
                        position, and then activate the DRiVE mode.
                        (See page 79.)




                                                                                             161]]></page><page Index="170"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 162  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Operation

                        Beaching                              Anchoring
                         NOTICE                                   WARNING

                         Small pebbles, sand, seaweed, and oth-  Always anchor from the bow. Anchoring
                          er debris can be sucked into the jet in-  from  the stern will  make the boat un-
                          takes  and impair or damage  the    steady. A strong current can pull a stern-
                          impellers. Always stop the engines be-  anchored boat underwater.
                          fore beaching the boat. Be sure the boat
                                                              Select an anchor appropriate for your boat
                          is in water 90 cm (3 ft) deep  from the
                                                              and water conditions. A “Danforth” (or fluke)
                          bottom  of the boat  before starting the
                                                              type anchor is suitable for most applications;
                          engines again.
                                                              your  Yamaha Boat Dealer can help you
                         Do not beach the boat on rocky beach-
                                                              choose an anchor.
                          es. The hull gelcoat and exposed pump
                                                              (1) Make sure the anchor line is securely tied
                          housings can be damaged.
                                                                 to the anchor and to the bow eye or a
                         Pay attention to shifts in tides. Beaching
                                                                 bow cleat.
                          at high tide may make it impossible to
                                                              (2) Move the  boat to the  spot where  you
                          re-launch the boat if the tide recedes.
                                                                 want to lower the  anchor, heading  the
                        (1) Make sure  no obstructions, boats,  or  boat into the wind or current. Stop the
                            swimmers are near the beach.         boat, and then lower the anchor until it
                        (2) Approach the beach slowly and stop the  hits bottom.
                            engines when the water is about 90 cm  (3) While keeping tension on the line, slowly
                            (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the boat.  back up the boat until you have let out
                            Remember: turning is  impossible with  line that is 4–6 times the depth of the wa-
                            the engines stopped.                 ter. For example, if you are anchoring in
                        (3) Get out of the boat and pull the bow up  10 feet of water, let out 40–60 feet of line.
                            on the beach.                        Secure the line.
                        (4) When leaving the beach, push the boat  (4) Pull on the line to be sure the anchor is
                            out into water that is at least 90 cm (3 ft)  holding. Also,  periodically check your
                            deep from the bottom of the boat before  boat’s position against the shoreline to
                            starting the engines.                make sure it is not drifting and dragging
                                                                 the anchor. Reset if necessary.
                                                              (5) To pull in (“weigh”) the anchor, start the
                                                                 engines and move forward, keeping ten-
                                                                 sion on the line as you pull it in. When the
                                                                 anchor line is straight up and down, pull
                                                                 hard to lift the anchor from the bottom
                                                                 material.








                        162]]></page><page Index="171"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 163  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                  Operation

                        (6) If the anchor is stuck on the bottom, try  To cross a wake or swell, change your speed
                            this: Let out a few feet of anchor line and  and choose the angle at which you cross the
                            secure the line to the boat, again. Slowly  wake or swell. Usually, a slower speed and
                            maneuver the boat around the anchor  “quartering” the wake (crossing at an angle)
                            until the anchor pulls loose. Keep the line  will reduce the jolt.
                            taut during this procedure.       Two other things you may notice. The first is
                                                              that crossing a group of wakes or swells is
                        Crossing wakes and swells             not as easy or smooth as crossing just one
                        You will not always have flat, smooth water.  wake. The second is that when you quarter
                        There will  be  swells and wakes from other  the wake or swell, the boat will try to steer
                        boats, etc.                           away from the wake or swell. When crossing
                        The best way to cross wakes and swells is  at a 45° angle, you may not notice this, but at
                        with the least jolt to you and the boat. Small  a smaller angle, say 10°, it can be very strong.
                        swells are not as difficult to cross as larger  Be prepared to steer and balance as neces-
                        swells or wakes. Crossing a sharp wake gives  sary.
                        more of a jolt than a broad swell.
                                                                  Wake




                                   Sharp wakes

                                                                  90˚
                                                                            45˚
                                                                                     10˚
                                    Broad swell


























                                                                                             163]]></page><page Index="172"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 164  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Operation

                             Post-operation checks               alternately pushing the remote control le-
                        These post-operation procedures are devel-  ver up to half throttle and back to idle for
                        oped to help preserve the long-term appear-  10 to 15 seconds. NOTICE: Do not run
                        ance and reliability of your boat. Perform  the engine over 4000 r/min on land. Al-
                        these procedures as soon as possible after  so, do not run  the engine for more
                        the boat is loaded back on the trailer after the  than 15 seconds without  supplying
                        day’s use.                               water,  otherwise, the engine  could
                        Some owners prefer to moor their boat sea-  overheat and/or seize.
                        sonally, rather than keeping it on the trailer  (3) Stop the engine.
                        between uses.  Extended mooring  is not  (4) Wash down the hull, helm, and both jet
                        recommended by Yamaha, but can be        drive units with fresh water.
                        performed if proper precautions are taken  (5) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                        to help guard against prolonged environ-  110 for rear platform hatch opening and
                        mental exposure  and marine growth.      closing procedures.)
                        Proper flushing of the cooling system on  (6) Remove the access port caps to let any
                        each engine is not possible with the boat in  water drain  that has pooled  on them.
                        the water. In addition, conditions such as  (See page 188 for access port cap re-
                        stray electrical voltage in the water, marine  moval and installation procedures.) If the
                        organisms, and saltwater corrosion can ad-  boat will be stored on the trailer nearby,
                        versely affect the life of many boat compo-  leave the caps out until you prepare to
                        nents.  NOTICE: Leaving the boat in the  launch the boat again. If the boat will be
                        water for extended periods will accelerate  transported on the trailer any distance,
                        the rate of normal deterioration of the ex-  temporarily reinstall the caps and close
                        posed drive components.                  the hatch until you get home. Open the
                        If you do decide to moor your boat, be sure to  hatch again when you arrive and remove
                        remove it from the water periodically to clean  the caps as before. Leave the caps loose
                        the hull and jet pump areas. The frequency of  until you plan to transport the boat on the
                        maintenance required will depend upon    trailer again. NOTICE: Leaving the ac-
                        whether the water is salt water or fresh water  cess port caps out when you are not
                        and other local water conditions. See  your  using or transporting the boat helps
                        dealer for additional preventative mainte-  keep them from becoming stuck in the
                        nance recommendations on mooring and/or  access ports.
                        saltwater use for your area.          (7) Remove the hull drain plug. (See page
                        (1) After putting the boat on the trailer, flush  136.)
                            the cooling  system  on each engine  to  (8) Rinse  the engine compartment with a
                            prevent the cooling  system from  clog-  small amount of fresh water. Be careful
                            ging up with salt, sand, or dirt. Refer to  not to get water on the air filter area or
                            page 170 for the cooling system flushing  electrical components. Allow any water
                            procedure.                           in the bilge to drain out. After the water
                        (2) Drain residual water from the exhaust  has drained, wipe the engine compart-
                            system by starting the engine, and then  ment and bilge with dry rags.


                        164]]></page><page Index="173"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 165  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                  Operation

                        (9) Reinstall the hull drain plug.  NOTICE:
                            Tighten the hull drain  plug  securely
                            before launching the boat. Otherwise,
                            water may flood the boat and cause it
                            to submerge. Clean any foreign mate-
                            rial, such  as dirt or sand, from the
                            threads  and the O-ring on the hull
                            drain plug before installing the drain
                            plug.
                        (10) Spray a rust inhibitor, such as Yamaha
                            Silicone Protectant and Lubricant, on
                            metallic parts to minimize corrosion.
                        (11) Use a boat cover designed for your boat,
                            or store the boat in a building or under a
                            canopy or carport in order to prevent rain
                            from falling onto the boat. Because all of
                            the water  will not be drained from  the
                            deck automatically, take sufficient mea-
                            sures to prevent rainwater from entering
                            the boat. NOTICE: Make sure that the
                            turnbuckles on the boat cover do not
                            contact the boat directly when using
                            the cover. Otherwise, the boat could
                            be damaged.
                        (12) Turn the battery switch to the OFF (red)
                            position. (See page 37 for more informa-
                            tion.)
























                                                                                             165]]></page><page Index="174"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 166  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Trailering

                                Trailering the boat           Use safety chains between the towing vehicle
                                                              and the trailer so the trailer will not detach
                             WARNING
                                                              completely from the towing vehicle if it acci-
                        Avoid accident and injury from improper  dentally comes loose from the hitch ball.
                        trailering:                           Crisscross the chains under the trailer tongue
                         The  trailer must be matched  for  the  so the tongue will not hit the road surface if it
                          boat’s weight and hull.             falls loose. Rig the chains as tightly as possi-
                         The towing vehicle must have the ca-  ble while allowing just enough slack to permit
                          pacity of pulling the load. Pulling a load  tight turns.
                          that exceeds the towing capacity may  Be sure the tongue weight (vertical weight on
                          cause loss of control.              the hitch point) is correct. Generally, 5% to
                         Be sure the boat is secured to the trailer  10% of the combined weight of the boat and
                          and the trailer is properly hitched to the  trailer should be on the tongue. Too much or
                          towing vehicle before towing.       too little weight can cause difficult steering or
                         Read the manuals supplied with the  trailer swaying.
                          trailer by the manufacturer.
                                                              Trailering checklist
                        A trailer is provided as standard equipment
                                                               Check your state laws to be sure your trail-
                        with your boat. If you need to obtain another
                                                               er meets all regulations, such as proper li-
                        trailer, choose one that  is manufactured  to
                                                               censing, brake, axle load, and safety chain
                        carry a boat of the size and weight of your
                                                               requirements.
                        boat. Check the certification label on the left
                                                               Check the trailer for any loose fasteners or
                        forward side of the trailer. This label  is  re-
                                                               damaged parts.
                        quired to show the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
                                                               Check the tires for proper inflation.
                        ing (GVWR), which is the load carrying
                                                               Check the wheel bearings and wheel lug
                        capacity of the trailer plus the trailer’s weight.
                                                               nuts before each trip.
                        Be sure that the total weight of your boat, any
                                                               Check the tail, brake, and turn signal lights
                        cargo, and the trailer weight itself does not
                                                               for proper operation.
                        exceed the GVWR.
                        Hitch
                        The trailer hitch ball must match the size of
                        the socket on the trailer hitch coupler. Hitch-
                        es are divided into classes that specify the
                        Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) and the maxi-
                        mum tongue weight. Always use a hitch rated
                        for the same or higher class. Use a bolted-on
                        or welded-on hitch; clamp-on bumper hitch-
                        es are not recommended. Be sure the trailer
                        hitch’s release handle is latched with the lock
                        pin installed before towing.



                        166]]></page><page Index="175"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 167  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                   Trailering

                         Secure the bow of the boat to the trailer   Be sure any cargo that must be carried in
                          with the winch line and also with the chain.  the boat as well as the folding windshield
                          Secure the stern eyes to the trailer with tie-  and all hatches are  secured. A durable,
                          downs.                               properly fitting cover, such as the genuine
                                                               Yamaha cover available from your Yamaha
                                                               Boat Dealer designed specifically for your
                                                               boat, is highly recommended to help pro-
                                                               tect your boat  during  transport and stor-
                                                               age.
                                                               Carry a spare tire for the trailer, along with
                                                               sufficient tools to change the tire.
                                                               While traveling, check the wheel hubs on
                                                   1           the trailer whenever you park. If a hub feels
                                                               abnormally hot, have the bearing inspected
                                                               before continuing your trip. On longer trips,
                        1  Bow eye
                                                               it is a good idea to carry a set of spare
                                                               wheel bearings, seals, and races.
                                                               When making a turn, do not cut corners.
                                                               The trailer has a smaller turning circle, so it
                                                               turns more sharply around the corner than
                                                               the towing vehicle.

                                                              Backing your trailer
                                                              It takes practice to back a trailer successfully.
                                         1
                                                              If you are not familiar backing up with a trailer,
                                                              practice first in an open area away from ob-
                        1  Stern eye
                                                              stacles.
                         Take down and store  the  bimini top,  if
                          used. The bimini top is not designed to stay
                          unsecured on the boat at highway speeds.
                          (See page 126 or 130.)
                        TIP:
                        During transport, use a boat cover to prevent
                        any items from blowing out of the boat, or
                        make sure to store any items inside the stor-
                        age compartments and securely close the
                        compartments.
                         Be sure the access port caps are properly
                          installed (see page 188 for more informa-
                          tion) and the rear platform hatch is closed
                          securely.


                                                                                             167]]></page><page Index="176"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 168  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Trailering

                        Keep the following points in mind when   sible, have a second person stand aside
                        backing up                               as an observer. Stop when  the wheels
                         Back slowly. Make steering adjustments in  are at least halfway submerged. Set the
                          small steps.                           parking brake.
                         Turn the towing vehicle’s wheels opposite  (5) Remove the bow line from the bow eye.
                          the direction you want the trailer to go.  (6) Back the trailer farther into the water until
                         After the trailer begins moving, turn the  just the tops of the  fenders  show, and
                          towing vehicle to follow it.           then reset the parking brake. Board the
                         Have a second person stand by to help di-  boat and start it. If possible, remain on
                          rect you with hand signals.            the trailer until the engines are warm and
                                                                 are responding to throttle.
                        Launching                             (7) Back the boat out into the water, watch-
                        As a courtesy to other boaters, prepare your  ing carefully for people, other boats, or
                        boat for launching before using the ramp.  obstacles.
                        Each launch may have particular differences,
                        such as ramp angle, prevailing wind, waves,  Loading
                        and water currents. If possible, watch a cou-  (1) Disconnect the trailer  lights from the
                        ple of boaters launch their boats first to notice  towing vehicle.
                        any problems. While every boater develops a  (2) Back the trailer down the ramp as close
                        preferred launch procedure, here is a recom-  to 90° to the shoreline as you can. If pos-
                        mended general procedure:                sible, have a second person act as an
                                                                 observer while standing to the side of the
                                                                 trailer. Stop when the tops of the trailer’s
                                                                 fenders are  about  3 inches above  the
                                                                 waterline.
                                                              (3) With the boat moving at the slowest idle
                                                                 speed, guide the boat onto the support
                                                                 rails. Use throttle only if necessary for
                                                                 steering ability.  WARNING! Using too
                                                                 much throttle  can cause the boat to
                                                                 jump  over the front of  the trailer,
                        (1) Perform the pre-operation checks     which can result in injury to the boat
                            shown on page 140 that can be per-   operator and bystanders.
                            formed on land.                   (4) Make sure the boat is centered on the
                        (2) Remove all trailering tie-down lines from  support rails and is headed straight for
                            the boat and attach your docking lines  the bow stop (bumper board). Ease the
                            and fenders, if used.                boat forward until the bow rests against
                        (3) Disconnect the trailer  lights  from the  the bow stop. NOTICE: The winch line
                            towing vehicle.                      is not designed to pull the boat onto
                        (4) Back the trailer down the ramp as close  the trailer.
                            to 90° to the shoreline as you can. If pos-



                        168]]></page><page Index="177"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 169  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                   Trailering

                        (5) Attach and  tighten the  winch line.  Lifting
                            NOTICE: The winch line should not be  NOTICE
                            the only line securing the bow during
                            trailering. Use the chain along with the  Do not attach lifting cables to the bow eye,
                            winch to secure the boat to the trailer.  cleats, stern eyes, ski tow hook, or hand-
                                                              grips. Serious damage to the boat can oc-
                                                              cur. Use only a sling designed specifically
                                                              for lifting boats.
                                                              If you need to remove the boat from the water
                                                              without a trailer, use these guidelines:
                                                               Use a sling-type lifting  mechanism  de-
                                                               signed for lifting boats. The sling should be
                                                               covered with a protective material to pre-
                                                   1
                                                               vent damage to the hull gelcoat.
                                                               Use spreader bars to avoid side stress to
                        1  Bow eye                             the hull that may cause cracks in the gel-
                                                               coat and fiberglass.
                        (6) Pull the trailer up the ramp out of the way   Attach guidelines to the bow eye and stern
                            of other boaters. Attach the bow and  eyes to control movement of the boat dur-
                            stern tie-downs. Reconnect the trailer  ing lifting.
                            lights.                            Remove all people and all cargo from the
                                                               boat. Drain any excess water from the bilge
                                                               using the bilge pump.
                                                               Be sure all people are standing clear, and
                                                               then lift the boat slowly and just far enough
                                                               to verify that the boat is securely held and
                                                               properly balanced. If necessary, lower the
                                                               boat again and adjust the slings.
                                                               When ready, lift the boat slowly and care-
                                         1                     fully.

                        1  Stern eye
                        (7) Perform the post-operation checks  on
                            page 164.











                                                                                             169]]></page><page Index="178"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 170  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Care and storage

                               Post-operation care            (3) Connect the garden hose to a water tap.
                        Flushing the cooling system           (4) Make sure that the area around the boat
                        Cooling system flushing is essential to pre-  is clear, and then start the engine. Imme-
                        vent the cooling system from  clogging up  diately after the engine starts, fully turn
                        with salt, sand, or dirt.                the water supply on so that water flows
                        (1) Connect the garden hose adapter to a  out continually from the jet thrust nozzle
                            garden hose.                         and cooling water pilot outlet. NOTICE:
                                                                 Never turn on the water before start-
                                                                 ing the engine. The water could flow
                                1                2               back through the muffler into the
                                                                 crankcase causing  severe engine
                                                                 damage. Be sure to turn on the water
                                                                 immediately after starting the engine
                                                                 to prevent engine overheating.
                                                              (5) Run the engine at a fast idle for 3 to 5
                                                                 minutes. If the engine stops while flush-
                                                                 ing, turn the water supply off immediately
                                                                 and perform  the procedure  again from
                        1  Garden hose adapter
                                                                 step 4.
                        2  Garden hose
                                                              (6) Turn off the water supply, and then drain
                        (2) Loosen the flush hose connector cap for  residual water from the exhaust system
                            the engine you are going to flush and re-  by alternately pushing the remote control
                            move it. Insert the garden hose adapter  lever up to half throttle and back to idle
                            into the flush hose connector by pushing  for 10 to 15 seconds.
                            and twisting it until it is securely connect-  (7) Stop the engine. NOTICE: Never have
                            ed.                                  the water on when the engine is not
                                                                 running. The water  could  flow back
                            1                                    through the muffler into the crankcase
                                              3                  causing severe engine damage. Do
                                                                 not run the engine for more than 15
                                                                 seconds  after the water supply  has
                                2
                                                                 been turned off to avoid engine over-
                                                                 heating.
                                                              (8) Remove the garden hose adapter.
                                                              (9) Install and tighten the cap securely.
                                                              (10) Repeat  the flushing procedure for  the
                                                                 other engine.



                        1  Flush hose connector
                        2  Flush hose connector cap
                        3  Garden hose adapter


                        170]]></page><page Index="179"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 171  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                       Care and storage

                        Cleaning the boat                        ture with clean,  dry  rags.  NOTICE: Be
                                                                 careful not to get water on the air filter
                             WARNING
                                                                 area or electrical components. Do not
                        Gasoline and its vapors are highly flamma-  use high-pressure water when rinsing
                        ble and explosive. If there is fuel or a fu-  the engine or engine compartment as
                        el/water  mixture   in  the   engine     severe engine damage could result.
                        compartment, wipe it up immediately with  (4) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                        dry rags. Do not operate the boat until the  110 for rear platform hatch opening and
                        source of the fuel leak is found and cor-  closing procedures.)
                        rected.                               (5) Remove the access port caps to let any
                                                                 water drain  that has pooled  on them.
                        TIP:
                                       ®
                        Quality Yamaclean , Yamashield™, and oth-  (See page 188 for access port cap re-
                                                                 moval and installation procedures.) If the
                        er Yamalube care products are available from
                                                                 boat will be stored on the trailer nearby,
                        your Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                                                                 leave the caps out until you prepare to
                        (1) Remove the hull drain plug. (See page
                                                                 launch the boat again. If the boat will be
                            136 for hull drain plug removal and instal-
                                                                 transported on the trailer any distance,
                            lation procedures.)
                                                                 temporarily reinstall the caps and close
                                                                 the hatch until you get home. Open the
                                                                 hatch again when you arrive and remove
                                                                 the caps as before. Leave the caps loose
                                                                 until you plan to transport the boat on the
                                                                 trailer again. NOTICE: Leaving the ac-
                                                                 cess port caps out when you are not
                                                                 using or transporting the boat helps
                                                                 keep them from becoming stuck in the
                                                                 access ports. (See page 188 for more
                                                  1
                                                                 information.)
                        1  Hull drain plug                    (6) Securely install  the hull drain plug by
                                                                 tightening it until it stops. NOTICE: Be-
                        (2) Clean the  hull, boat  interior, and  drive
                                                                 fore installing the hull drain plug, clean
                            units with Yamaclean Wash & Wax Con-
                                                                 the drain plug threads and O-ring to
                            centrate, or a mild natural soap, and wa-
                                                                 remove any foreign materials, such as
                            ter. Rinse with fresh water. Scum on the
                                                                 dirt or sand. Otherwise, the hull drain
                            hull can be removed with Yamaclean Hull
                                                                 plug could be damaged, allowing wa-
                            Cleaner™. NOTICE: Incorrect cleaning
                                                                 ter to enter the hull. Check the O-ring
                            can damage vinyl. See “Basic stain
                                                                 on the hull drain plug and make sure
                            guide” on page 173.
                                                                 that the hull drain plug is tightened se-
                        (3) Clean the engine and bilge areas with
                                                                 curely before launching the boat. Oth-
                            Yamaclean Bilge Cleaner™ or an equiv-
                                                                 erwise, water may flood the boat and
                            alent and rinse with fresh water. Drain all
                                                                 cause it to submerge.
                            water and wipe up any remaining mois-
                                                                                             171]]></page><page Index="180"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 172  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Care and storage

                        (7) Spray the exterior of  the engines with
                            Yamalube Silicone Protectant  &  Lubri-
                            cant, or an equivalent. For areas requir-
                            ing heavy protection, use Yamashield™.
                        (8) Wax the hull  with Yamaclean  Spray
                               ®
                            Wax  or other non-abrasive wax de-
                            signed  for marine gelcoat.  WARNING!
                            Slippery surfaces can cause falls and
                            injury. Be careful not  to  apply too
                            much wax on deck and gunwale step-
                            ping surfaces.  This will  make them
                            slippery.
                        (9) Wipe  all vinyl and  rubber components,
                            such as the seats and engine compart-
                            ment seals, with Yamaclean Vinyl Dress-
                            ing™ or other quality vinyl protectant.
                            NOTICE: Some well-known “protec-
                            tant” products on the market can ac-
                            tually damage vinyl over time. Consult
                            a Yamaha Boat Dealer if you want to
                            use a product other than Yamaclean
                            Vinyl Protectant.
                        (10) Vacuum and hose-off the carpeting as
                            necessary.  If needed, use  Yamaclean
                                        ®
                            Carpet Cleaner  or other quality brand-
                            name carpet cleaner  product to clean
                            soiled areas. NOTICE: Always dry the
                            carpet face up. Never roll up the car-
                            pet. Never fold the carpet.
                        (11) Wash the fabric of the bimini top with a
                            mild natural soap in lukewarm water,
                            then rinse. Do not use detergents. Allow
                            to air dry thoroughly before storage.















                        172]]></page><page Index="181"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 173  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                       Care and storage

                        Basic stain guide
                        Here are basic steps to remove common stains from boat upholstery. Consult a Yamaha Boat
                        Dealer or upholstery-cleaning professional for difficult stains.

                         TYPE OF STAIN                 STEPS
                                                       (rinse with clean, warm water and then dry after application)
                                                             1             2             3
                         General care/Dirt                   A             B             —
                         Chewing gum                         E             A             —
                         Coffee/Tea/Chocolate                B             —             —
                         Grease                              E             B             —
                         Ink*                                C             F             D
                         Ketchup                             A             B             —
                         Lipstick                            C             B             A
                         Mustard                             A             B             C
                         Mildew/Wet leaves*                  C             B             A
                         Motor oil                           B             —             —
                         Permanent marker*                   C             F             D
                         Suntan lotion*                      A             B             —
                         Tar/Asphalt                         E             B             —
                        * May cause permanent staining.
                               A       Medium-soft brush with warm, soapy water
                               B       Yamaclean All Purpose Cleaner or equivalent
                               C       Isopropyl alcohol (91% is best)
                                       Mixture of 1 tablespoon (15 ml) ammonia, 1/4 cup (60 ml) hydrogen peroxide, and
                               D
                                       3/4 cup (177 ml) water
                               E       Wipe or scrape off excess (chill gum with ice first)
                               F       Name brand ink remover



















                                                                                             173]]></page><page Index="182"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 174  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Care and storage

                        Battery care                          (3) If the battery will be stored for a longer
                        If the boat will not be used for more than a  period, check its state of charge (use a
                        month, remove the battery and store it in a  hydrometer or a voltmeter and load tes-
                        cool, dark place.                        ter) at least once a month and recharge
                        The battery is located in the engine compart-  the battery if it gets too low.
                        ment.                                 To charge the battery:
                        To remove the battery:                (1) Remove the caps from the cells. Add dis-
                        (1) Turn the battery switch to the OFF posi-  tilled  water if necessary  to top up  the
                            tion. (See page 37.)                 electrolyte to the proper level.
                        (2) Disconnect the ground lead (black) and  (2) Follow  the battery manufacturer’s  in-
                            the negative (–) battery lead (black).  structions for charging.  WARNING!
                        (3) Disconnect the positive (+) battery lead  When charging a battery, keep it well
                            (red).                               away from sparks and open flames, as
                        (4) Unfasten the battery strap, and then re-  it gives off explosive gases. When us-
                            move the battery from the boat.      ing a battery charger, connect the bat-
                                                                 tery to the charger before you turn on
                                    3                   2
                                 2                               the charger. This will prevent sparking
                                           4                     at the terminals that could ignite bat-
                                                                 tery gases.
                                                              To install the battery:
                                                              (1) Place the battery in  the battery holder,
                                                                 and then fasten the battery using the bat-
                                                                 tery strap.
                                                              (2) Connect the positive (+) battery lead (red)
                                                 1       1
                                                                 to the positive (+) battery terminal.
                                                                 NOTICE: Reversal of the battery leads
                        1  Positive (+) battery lead (red)
                        2  Negative (–) battery lead (black)     will damage the electrical parts.
                        3  Ground lead (black)                (3) Connect the negative (–)  battery lead
                        4  Battery strap                         (black) and the ground lead (black) to the
                                                                 negative (–) battery terminal.
                        To store the battery:                 (4) Make sure that the battery is securely
                        (1) Clean the battery casing and terminals  held in place.
                            using a mixture of baking soda and water
                            (one tablespoon of baking soda to one
                            cup of water).
                        (2) Apply dielectric grease or petroleum jelly
                            to the battery terminals  and to all  ex-
                            posed connectors.







                        174]]></page><page Index="183"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 175  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                       Care and storage

                               Long-term storage
                                                                Recommended water-resistant grease:
                        Storing your boat  for prolonged periods of
                                                                  YAMALUBE  MARINE GREASE or
                        time, such as winter storage in freezing tem-
                                                                  Yamaha Grease A
                        perature, requires preventative maintenance
                        to ensure against deterioration. It is advisable
                        to have the boat serviced by an authorized   Throttle cables (AR250 / SX250 / 252S)
                        Yamaha Boat Dealer before storage. Howev-  Grease the throttle-cable inner wires at the
                        er, the  following  procedures can be  per-  pulley wheel of each APS.
                        formed by the owner with a minimum of tools.

                        Fuel system
                        Fill the fuel tank with fresh fuel, adding one
                        ounce of Fuel Med RX, available from your
                        Yamaha Boat Dealer, to each gallon of fuel or
                        use an equivalent according to the manufac-
                        ture’s instructions. (See page 132 for infor-
                        mation on filling the fuel tank.) Do not “top
                        off” the tank, because fuel could spill. A full
                        fuel tank is less likely to allow condensation
                        to collect in the tank, reducing the chance of
                                                               Steering cable ball joints and inner wires
                        contaminated fuel. Running the engines with
                                                              Grease the steering cable and shift cable ball
                        treated fuel during  cooling system flushing
                                                              joints at the jet thrust nozzles.  Extend  the
                        will also help protect the fuel system.
                                                              steering cable and shift cable inner wires and
                        TIP:                                  apply a thin coat of grease to them.
                        Use of Fuel Med RX eliminates the need to
                        drain the fuel system. Consult a Yamaha Boat
                        Dealer or other qualified mechanic if the fuel
                        system is to be drained instead.

                        Lubrication
                        It is advisable to take the boat to a Yamaha
                        Boat Dealer to have the engines fogged for
                        long-term storage.

                        Grease points
                        To  keep  moving parts sliding or rotating
                        smoothly, coat them with water-resistant
                        grease.







                                                                                             175]]></page><page Index="184"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 176  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Care and storage

                         Pivot points
                        Grease all pivot points  of the  steering and  1
                        shift mechanisms at the pump ends.











                                                              1  Bearing housing grease nipple




                         Bearing housings
                        Grease  the bearing housings through the
                        grease nipples.  NOTICE: Fill the grease
                        slowly and carefully, because it can dam-
                        age the hoses and the joints.
                        The  first service should be  done after 10
                        hours or 1 month by a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                        Fill the bearing housings with water-resistant
                        grease through the grease nipples.
                          Grease capacity:
                            33.0–35.0 cc (1.11–1.18 oz)
                        After  first service:  Every  100 hours or 6
                        months (you may do this yourself).
                          Grease capacity:
                            6.0–8.0 cc (0.20–0.27 oz)


















                        176]]></page><page Index="185"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 177  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                             Maintenance

                                   Maintenance                Removing and installing the engine
                                                              covers
                             WARNING
                                                              The engine cover of each engine is remov-
                        Be sure to turn off the engines when you  able.
                        perform maintenance  unless otherwise  To remove the engine cover:
                        specified. If you are not familiar with ma-  (1) Open the engine hood. (See page 103.)
                        chine servicing, this work should be done  (2) Remove the engine cover screws.
                        by a Yamaha Boat Dealer or other quali-
                        fied mechanic.

                        Maintenance, replacement, or repair of  the
                        emission control devices and system may be                         1
                        performed by any marine SI engine repair es-
                        tablishment or individual. Warranty repair,
                        however, must be performed at an autho-
                        rized Yamaha Boat Dealer. A service manual
                        is available for purchase through a Yamaha
                        Boat Dealer for owners  who have the me-
                        chanical skills, tools, and other equipment  1  Engine cover screw
                        necessary to perform maintenance not cov-
                                                              (3) Lift up the engine cover and remove it.
                        ered by this owner’s/operator’s manual.

                        Owner’s/operator’s manual
                        It is advisable to always carry the own-
                        er’s/operator’s manual with  you whenever                        1
                        you use the boat.
                        To protect these materials from water dam-
                        age, it would be a good idea to put them in a
                        waterproof bag. If  your owner’s/operator’s
                        manual is damaged, order a replacement
                        from a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                        The service information included in this man-  1  Engine cover
                        ual is intended to provide you, the owner,
                        with the necessary information for complet-  To install the engine cover:
                        ing  your own preventive  maintenance and  (1) Place the engine cover in its original po-
                        minor repairs.                           sition, and then push it down.











                                                                                             177]]></page><page Index="186"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 178  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Maintenance

















                        (2) Install the engine cover screws.
                        (3) Close the engine hood.














































                        178]]></page><page Index="187"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 179  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                             Maintenance

                        Periodic maintenance chart
                        The periodic maintenance chart gives general guidelines for periodic maintenance. Have a
                        Yamaha dealer perform the checks in the following chart. However, maintenance may need
                        to be performed more frequently depending on your operating conditions. If you have any
                        questions, consult a Yamaha dealer.
                        This “√” mark indicates items to be checked and serviced by a Yamaha dealer.
                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation                 hours   hours   hours
                                                                        10
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                         Fuel hoses, clamps,   Check for damage, and check con-
                         canister, and check   nections and tightening of clamps      √
                         valve
                                           Check cap for damage, and check
                         Fuel filler cap                                              √
                                           seal for cracks and deformation
                         Fuel tank         Check installation            √            √
                         Main switches and
                         engine shut-off   Check operation               √            √
                         switch
                                           Check state of charge and termi-
                         Batteries         nals, and check for broken battery         √
                                           straps
                         Battery leads     Check terminals                            √
                         Battery switches  Check operation               √            √
                         Multi-function display  Check lighting          √            √
                         Neutral switches
                         (AR250 / SX250 /   Check operation              √            √
                         252S)
                         Hatch interlock
                         switches (wet stor-  Check operation            √            √
                         age compartment)
                         Blowers           Check operation               √            √
                         Horn              Check operation               √            √
                         Navigation lights  Check lighting               √            √
                                           Clean filter, check hoses for dam-
                         Electric bilge pump  age, and check tightening of            √
                                           clamps
                         Other electrical com-  Check operation of shower, stereo,   √  √
                         ponents           and other components
                         Steering master   Check operation and tilting mecha-  √      √
                         ASSY              nism, and check for looseness




                                                                                             179]]></page><page Index="188"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 180  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Maintenance


                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation           10    hours   hours   hours
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                                           Check hydraulic fluid level, and
                         Steering system   check for dirt in fluid
                         (hydraulic system)   Check for hydraulic fluid leakage,   √  √
                         (252SD)           and check parts for wear and dam-
                                           age
                                           Check operation from steering mas-
                         Steering system   ter ASSY to jet thrust nozzles, and   √    √
                         (252SD)           check for free play
                                           Check jet pumps for corrosion
                         Steering system   Check connections of connectors,
                         (electrical system)   and check for looseness   √            √
                         (252SD)
                         Steering cables   Check connections and exterior,            √
                         (except for 252SD)  and lubricate
                         Throttle/shift pad-  Check operation            √            √
                         dles (252SD)
                                           Check operation, and check link rod
                         Articulating keel                                            √
                                           for bends and damage
                                           Check exterior and operation,
                         Remote control le-  check shift operation, and check for   √  √
                         vers
                                           looseness
                         Throttle cables   Check connections and exterior,
                         (AR250 / SX250 /   and lubricate                             √
                         252S)
                                           Check connections and exterior,
                         Shift cables                                                 √
                                           and lubricate (shift gate end)
                         Exhaust hoses, wa-  Check for exhaust leakage, and
                         ter locks, and resona-  check clamps at connections          √
                         tors
                         Drain passages    Remove clogs                               √
                         Drain plug        Check O-ring                  √            √
                         Hull and deck     Check for damage              √            √
                                           Check installation and operation,
                         Windshield and seats                            √            √
                                           and check for damage
                         Wakeboard tower   Check installation, and check for
                         (except for SX250)   damage                     √            √
                         and bimini top
                         Hatches, hinges, and   Check installation       √            √
                         packing seals



                        180]]></page><page Index="189"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 181  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                             Maintenance


                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation                 hours   hours   hours
                                                                        10
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                         Ladders (bow and   Check installation           √            √
                         stern)
                         Access port caps  Check exterior and installation            √
                         Spark plugs       Check                         √            √
                         High-pressure fuel   Check connections and exterior,         √
                         hoses             and check for leakage
                         Engine oil        Replace                       √     √      √
                         Engine oil filters  Replace                                  √
                         Air filter elements  Check for damage and dirt               √
                         Intake hoses and   Check for damage, and check con-          √
                         breather hoses    nections
                         Throttle bodies   Lubricate throttle valves                  √
                         Anodes (engines)  Check for corrosion                              √ *2
                         Valve clearance   Check and adjust                                 √ *2
                         Rubber couplings  Check for looseness and noise                     √
                         Engine mounts     Check for damage and peeling                      √
                         Cooling water hoses   Check for damage, and check con-
                         and cooling water pi-  nections                                     √
                         lot outlet hoses
                         Water inlet strainers  Check for damage         √            √
                         Intake grates     Check for damage              √            √
                                           Check for bends, damage, and for-
                         Impellers                                       √            √
                                           eign material
                         Impeller ducts    Check and lubricate                        √
                                           Check for damage and lubricate
                         Drive shaft spline                                                  √
                                           splines
                                           Check bearings and grease condi-
                         Jet pump bearings                                                   √
                                           tion
                         Jet thrust nozzles  Check movement, and lubricate            √
                         Intermediate hous-  Lubricate                                √
                         ings
                         Anodes (jet pump   Check for corrosion                       √
                         units)
                        *1: Whichever comes first.
                        *2: Check every 200 hours.
                        Perform the pre-operation checks and  post-operation checks  before  performing  periodic
                        maintenance.


                                                                                             181]]></page><page Index="190"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 182  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Specifications

                                                     Specifications

                                         Item                             Specification
                         Boat capacity
                         Maximum people on board             12 person
                         Maximum load capacity               Except for 252XE
                                                             1180 kg (2600 lb)
                                                             252XE
                                                             1066 kg (2350 lb)
                         Dimensions and weight
                         Length                              7470 mm (294.0 in)
                         Beam                                2580 mm (102.0 in)
                         Height                              AR250/252SE/252XE/252SD
                                                             2900 mm (114.0 in)
                                                             SX250
                                                             1900 mm (75.0 in)
                                                             252S
                                                             2770 mm (109.0 in)
                         Draft                               520 mm (20.5 in)
                         Dry weight                          AR250 (3-star model)
                                                             1830 kg (4034 lb)
                                                             AR250 (4-star model)
                                                             1838 kg (4052 lb)
                                                             SX250 (3-star model)
                                                             1789 kg (3944 lb)
                                                             252S (3-star model)
                                                             1882 kg (4149 lb)
                                                             252S (4-star model)
                                                             1890 kg (4167 lb)
                                                             252SE (3-star model)
                                                             2065 kg (4553 lb)
                                                             252SE (4-star model)
                                                             2073 kg (4570 lb)
                                                             252XE (3-star model)
                                                             2073 kg (4570 lb)
                                                             252XE (4-star model)
                                                             2081 kg (4588 lb)
                                                             252SD (3-star model)
                                                             2092 kg (4612 lb)












                        182]]></page><page Index="191"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 183  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                            Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Performance
                         Maximum fuel consumption (for each engine)  3-star models
                                                             49.7 L/h (13.1 US gal/h, 10.9 Imp.gal/h)
                                                             4-star models
                                                             43.8 L/h (11.6 US gal/h, 9.6 Imp.gal/h)
                         Cruising range at full throttle     3-star models
                                                             2.86 hour
                                                             4-star models
                                                             3.24 hour
                         Trolling speed                      1300 ±100 r/min
                         Engine
                         Number of engines                   2
                         Engine type                         Liquid cooled 4-stroke, DOHC
                         Number of cylinders                 4
                         Engine displacement                 1812 cm 3
                         Bore × stroke                       86.0 × 78.0 mm (3.39 × 3.07 in)
                         Compression ratio                   11.0 : 1
                         Valve clearance-intake (cold)       0.14–0.23 mm (0.0055–0.0091 in)
                         Valve clearance-exhaust (cold)      0.28–0.37 mm (0.0110–0.0146 in)
                         Lubrication system                  Wet sump
                         Cooling system                      Water
                         Starting system                     Electric
                         Ignition system                     T.C.I.
                         Spark plug (NGK)                    LFR6A
                         Spark plug gap                      0.8–0.9 mm (0.031–0.035 in)
                         Battery capacity                    12 V, 85 Ah
                         Charging system                     Flywheel magneto























                                                                                             183]]></page><page Index="192"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 184  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Drive unit
                         Propulsion system                   Jet pump
                         Jet pump type                       Axial flow, single stage
                         Impeller rotation                   Counterclockwise
                         Pitch angle                         14.7°
                         Transmission                        Direct drive from engine
                         Jet thrust nozzle angle             23+23°
                         Fuel and oil
                         Recommended fuel                    Regular unleaded gasoline
                         Minimum octane rating (PON)         86
                         Minimum octane rating (RON)         90
                         Fuel tank total capacity            284 L (75.0 US gal, 62.5 Imp.gal)
                         Recommended engine oil              YAMALUBE 4W or 4-stroke motor oil




                         Recommended engine oil type SAE     SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-50
                         Recommended engine oil grade API    3-star models
                                                             API SG, SH, SJ, SL
                                                             4-star models
                                                             API SJ, SL
                         Engine oil total quantity           5.3 L (5.60 US qt, 4.66 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity without oil filter replacement  3.5 L (3.70 US qt, 3.08 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity with oil filter replacement  3.7 L (3.91 US qt, 3.26 Imp.qt)
                         Fuse amperage
                         Electronic throttle valve fuse      10 A
                         Fuel pump fuse                      10 A
                         Main relay drive fuse               10 A
                         Main fuse                           20 A
                         Battery fuse                        30 A
                         BCU fuse (252SE / 252XE / 252SD)    50 A
                         Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/Switch
                         Panel fuse                          20 A
                         CLH/CLG/Power Port/USB fuse         20 A
                         Horn fuse                           7.5 A
                         Bilge pump fuse                     4 A
                         Power distribution module fuse      20 A
                         USB fuse                            3 A
                         Accessory fuse                      20 A




                        184]]></page><page Index="193"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 185  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                                                   Troubleshooting
                        If you have any trouble with your boat, use this section to check for the possible cause. If you
                        cannot find the cause or if the procedure for replacement or repair is not described in this own-
                        er’s/operator’s manual, ask your Yamaha Boat Dealer or a qualified mechanic for the proper
                        service.

                        Troubleshooting chart
                        The Troubleshooting  chart contains:  “TROUBLE,” “POSSIBLE  CAUSE,” “REMEDY,” and
                        “PAGE.”
                        Check the possible cause and remedy, and also the referred page for the maintenance steps
                        to solve the trouble.
                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Starter mo-  Engine shut-off   Clip on cord is not in   Install clip in engine shut-off
                         tor does not   switch (252SE /   place     switch                   37
                         turn over   252XE / 252SD)
                                     Fuse          Burned out       Replace fuse and check wiring  194
                                     Battery       Run down         Recharge                174
                                                   Poor terminal con-  Tighten as required  174
                                                   nections
                                                   Battery switch off  Turn on switch        37
                                     Rear platform   Not latched    Latch securely          110
                                     hatch
                                     Starter compo-  Faulty         Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     nent                           Boat Dealer
                                     Remote control   Not in neutral posi-  Move remote control lever to   40
                                     lever         tion             neutral position
                                     Throttle/shift pad-  Squeezed  Release                  42
                                     dle (252SD)























                                                                                             185]]></page><page Index="194"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 186  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Trouble recovery


                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Starter mo-  Engine shut-off   Clip on cord is not in   Install clip in engine shut-off
                         tor turns   switch (AR250 /   place        switch                   37
                         over/engine   SX250 / 252S)
                         does not    Fuel          Empty            Refill as soon as possible  132
                         start
                                                   Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   ed               Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel tank     Water or dust col-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   lected           Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Crankcase     Filled with fuel  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Filled with water  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel filter   Clogged or water   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   collected        Boat Dealer
                         Warning is   Over temperature  Jet intake clogged  Clean           188
                         displayed   warning*      Cooling system   Clean
                                                   clogged                                  151
                                     Oil pressure   Oil pressure dropped  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     warning*                       Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel          Empty            Refill as soon as possible  132
                                     Checking engine   Faulty sensors  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     warning                        Boat Dealer
                         Engine runs   Fuel        Empty            Refill as soon as possible   132
                         irregularly or            Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha
                         stalls                    ed               Boat Dealer              —
                                     Fuel filter   Water or dust col-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   lected           Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel tank     Water or dirt present  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Incorrect heat range   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Gap incorrect    Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                         *Engine speed will be limited to 3500 rpm.









                        186]]></page><page Index="195"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 187  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery


                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Boat speed   Cavitation   Jet intake  clogged  Clean               188
                         too slow or   Engine overheat*  Jet intake clogged   Clean         188
                         loses power
                                                   Cooling system   Clean                   151
                                                   clogged
                                     Fuel filter   Clogged          Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Incorrect heat range   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Gap incorrect    Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel          Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   ed               Boat Dealer
                         *Engine speed will be limited to 3500 rpm.









































                                                                                             187]]></page><page Index="196"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 188  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Trouble recovery

                             Emergency procedures
                        Jet pump clean-out procedure
                                                                            2
                             WARNING
                        Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                        nore any of the following:
                         Turn off and remove both main switch
                          keys, remove the clip from the engine
                          shut-off switch, and wait for all move-
                          ment to stop  before removing the  ac-                              1
                          cess port caps.
                                                              1  Strap eye
                         Never override the interlocks to run the  2  Retaining cord
                          engines with the rear platform hatch
                          open.                               (4) While holding the  handle and  pushing
                         The impellers have sharp  edges.  Be   down, turn the access port cap counter-
                          careful when reaching into jet pump ar-  clockwise until the “SET” mark is aligned
                          eas.                                   with the slot, and then lift the cap by the
                                                                 handle.
                        If weeds or debris get caught in the intakes or
                        impellers, cavitation can occur, and though  NOTICE
                        the engine speed rises, forward thrust will de-   Do not lift or pull the cap with the retain-
                        crease. If this condition is allowed to contin-  ing cord.
                        ue, jet pump damage can occur and the   Set the cap where it cannot be acciden-
                        engines may overheat and seize. If there is  tally knocked overboard.
                        any sign that a  jet intake or impeller is
                        clogged  with  weeds or debris, follow this
                        clean-out procedure.
                        (1) Turn off and remove the main switch key,
                            remove the clip from the engine shut-off
                            switch, and  wait for all movement  to
                            stop.
                        (2) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                            110.)                                   1
                        (3) Check that the retaining cord is securely                   2
                            attached to the  access  port cap  and
                            strap eye.                        1  “SET” mark
                                                              2  Slot









                        188]]></page><page Index="197"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 189  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery



                                  1



                                                                                          1


                                                                    3
                                                                                        2


                        1  Access port cap                    1  “SET” mark
                                                              2  Slot
                        (5) Remove any weeds or debris from the  3  Edge of the access port
                            drive shaft, impeller, pump housing, and
                            jet thrust nozzle. If you cannot remove  (8) Check that the cap is perpendicular to
                            the debris, consult a Yamaha Boat Deal-  the centerline of the boat. Pull the handle
                            er.                                  forcefully  to make sure  that the cap is
                        (6) To reinstall the access port  cap, first  locked securely. If a strong pull will move
                            clean off any sand or other foreign matter  the access port cap, it is not locked se-
                            from the cap or port surfaces. Apply a  curely—the cap could be forced out by
                            light coat of Yamalube Waterproof Ma-  water pressure during operation.
                            rine Grease (P/N: ACC-GREAS-10-CT), if
                            available, to the seal of the access port
                            cap. If grease is not available, apply the
                            grease  during  the  post-operation
                            checks.                               1
                        (7) Insert the cap so that the “SET” mark is
                            aligned  with  the slot, and then while
                            pushing the handle turn the cap clock-
                            wise until the “SET” mark is aligned with
                            the edge of the access port.
                                                              1  Perpendicular to the centerline of the boat

                                                              (9) Close the rear platform hatch.
                                                              NOTICE
                                                              Be sure the access port caps are locked
                                                              securely in place. Otherwise, the caps
                                                              could be forced out of the access ports by
                                                              water pressure,  causing loss of  perfor-
                                                              mance and possible damage.



                                                                                             189]]></page><page Index="198"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 190  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Trouble recovery


                        TIP:
                        The rear platform hatch has interlocks to shut
                        off the engines should the hatch be acciden-
                        tally opened during operation.  The engines
                        will not restart unless the hatch is closed and
                        latched.

                        Raising the shift gates
                        (252SE / 252XE / 252SD)                1
                        If the shift actuator malfunctions and the shift
                        gates remain in the lowered position, the boat  1  Manual release lever
                        will not be able to move forward.
                        After raising the shift gates so that the boat  (5) Use a screwdriver or similar tool to re-
                        can move forward, immediately return to  move the shift rod covers.
                        shore and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer ser-
                        vice the boat.                                    1
                        To raise the shift gates:
                        (1) Stop the engines and remove the clip
                            from the engine shut-off switch.
                        (2) Open the driver’s side console compart-
                            ment. (See page 107.)
                        (3) Remove the nuts, and then remove the
                            shift motor cover.


                                1                             1  Shift rod cover

                                                              (6) Slide the shift rods to port (left) to raise
                                                                 the shift gates to the forward position.

                                                       2




                                                                                  1
                        1  Shift motor cover
                        2  Nut

                        (4) Move  the manual release levers of  the
                            shift motors to the manual operation po-
                            sition.
                                                              1  Shift rod




                        190]]></page><page Index="199"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 191  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                                                              (4) Move the manual release levers of the
                                                                 shift motors to the electronic operation
                          1                                      position.
                                                              Power steering system will not
                                                              operate (252SD)
                                                              If the power steering system malfunctions, a
                                                              warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                                                              play and the direction of the boat cannot be
                                                              changed even if the steering wheel is turned.
                        1  Shift gate

                                                                                     S
                                                                        S
                        TIP:                                            SEE    S S   SW W
                         When the manual release levers are in the
                                                                       Check Engine !
                          manual operation position, the shift gates
                                                                       Stop steering.
                                                                       Open service valve of pump. Move cylinder to center  NEXT
                          cannot be moved to the neutral or reverse  0 rpmpm  position. Using the two remote control levers, perform the boat  x1000 1000
                                                              0
                                                                r
                                                                                               x
                                                                       steering operation by the engine speed difference.
                                                                       Consult YAMAHA dealer.  QUIT
                          positions.
                         When the manual release levers are in the
                          manual operation  position, the boat  will
                                                                                               o
                                                                lg
                                                               Bilgee  Bl owe           N Navav  Anchor r
                                                               B
                                                                i
                                                                                              h
                                                                                            A
                                                                                             nc
                                                                   Blowerr
                          move forward even if the remote control le-
                          vers are moved to the reverse position.
                         252SD:  When the manual release levers  Manually point the jet thrust nozzles in the
                          are in the manual operation position, the  straight-ahead direction, and then use  the
                          boat will move forward even if the DRiVE  difference in the amount of throttle for the
                          mode is activated  and the  throttle/shift  port and starboard engines to steer the boat
                          paddle (left) is pulled.            and return to shore. After returning to shore,
                        (7) Move  the manual release levers of  the  have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.
                            shift motors to the electronic operation  TIP:
                            position.                         If  a malfunction  is  detected for the power
                        If the shift gates cannot be raised using the  steering system, the maximum engine speed
                        preceding procedure, the shift gates can be  will be limited to approximately 5000 rpm.
                        raised manually from the water.
                        To raise the shift gates from the water:  To point the jet thrust nozzles in the straight-
                        (1) Follow the above steps 1–4 for “To raise  ahead direction:
                            the shift gates”.                 (1) Stop the engines  and remove the clip
                        (2) Enter the water and move to the rear of  from the engine shut-off switch.
                            the boat.                         (2) Open the driver’s side console compart-
                        (3) Raise the shift gates to the forward posi-  ment. (See page 107.)
                            tion.                             (3) Turn the  service valve on  the steering
                                                                 pump in the direction shown in the illus-
                                                                 tration.
                                                                                             191]]></page><page Index="200"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 192  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Trouble recovery





                                               1








                                                                    1          2
                        1  Service valve                      1  Cable holder
                                                              2  Edge of the bracket
                        (4) Open the front underseat storage com-
                            partment (starboard), and then open the  (6) Tighten the service valve.
                            box to access the steering cylinder.
                                                              To change the steering direction of the boat:
                                                    1         Activate the running mode and use the differ-
                                                              ence in the amount of throttle for the port and
                                                              starboard engines.
                                                              Turning to port





                                                                                      F
                                                                                      N
                        1  Steering cylinder
                                                                                      R
                        (5) Move the cable holder manually  and
                            align the end of the rod with the edge of
                            the bracket.
                                                              Turning to starboard





                                                                                      F
                                                                                      N
                                                                                      R







                        192]]></page><page Index="201"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 193  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery


                        TIP:                                          1       2
                        Because the port and starboard engines op-
                        erate at the same engine speed when the sin-
                        gle lever mode or DRiVE mode is activated,
                        the difference in the amount of throttle for the
                                                                        3
                        engines cannot be used to steer the boat.
                                                                              4
                        Jump-starting                                                        5
                             WARNING
                        Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                                                              1  Negative (–) jumper cable
                        nore any of the following:
                                                              2  Positive (+) jumper cable
                         If the blowers will not operate, ventilate  3  Engine hanger
                          the engine compartment by opening the  4  Booster battery
                          engine hood for several minutes before  5  Start battery
                          attempting a jump-start.
                         Do not connect the negative (–) jumper  (4) Start the engines, and then disconnect
                          cable to the negative (–) terminal of the  the jumper cables by reversing the above
                          dead  battery. Sparks could ignite bat-  steps. NOTICE: Do not turn the main
                          tery or fuel vapors, which could cause  switch key or push the “START/STOP”
                          an explosion.                          button for more than 5 seconds. If the
                                                                 engine does not start in 5 seconds, re-
                        If the  boat battery  runs down,  the engines
                                                                 lease  the main switch key or
                        can be started in an emergency using a 12-
                                                                 “START/STOP” button and try again
                        volt booster battery and jumper cables.
                                                                 after 15 seconds.  Continuous crank-
                        To connect the jumper cables:
                                                                 ing for more than 5 seconds will dis-
                        (1) Connect the positive (+) terminal of the
                                                                 charge the battery and  the  engines
                            dead battery to the positive (+) terminal
                                                                 will not start. The starter motors may
                            of the booster battery with the positive
                                                                 also be damaged if they are engaged
                            (+) jumper cable.
                                                                 continuously for more than 5 seconds.
                        (2) Connect one  end of the negative  (–)
                            jumper cable to the negative (–) terminal
                            of the booster battery.
                        (3) Connect the other end of the negative (–)
                            jumper cable to  an engine hanger.
                            NOTICE: Be sure all connections are
                            secure and correct before attempting
                            to start the engines. Any wrong con-
                            nection may damage  the  electrical
                            system.





                                                                                             193]]></page><page Index="202"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 194  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Trouble recovery

                        Fuse replacement
                                                                 1 23       4  5       6 7
                             WARNING

                        Do not use  fuses  of a higher amperage
                        than recommended. Substitution with  a                              8
                        fuse that has an improper rating can cause                          9
                        extensive electrical system  damage  and
                        possible fire.
                                                                                            8
                        If a fuse is blown, replace it with the proper
                        fuse.                                             11      10
                        To replace a fuse:                    1  Electronic throttle valve fuse
                        (1) Open the engine hood. (See page 103.)  2  Fuel pump fuse
                        (2) While pushing both sides of the fuse box  3  Main relay drive fuse
                            cover inward, pull the cover toward the  4  Main fuse
                                                              5  Spare fuse (252SE / 252XE / 252SD)
                            bow and remove it.
                                                              6  Fuse puller
                                                              7  Battery fuse (AR250 / SX250 / 252S)
                                                              8  Screw (252SE / 252XE / 252SD)
                                                              9  BCU fuse (252SE / 252XE / 252SD)
                                                              10 Spare fuse
                                        1                     11 Unused fuse

                                                              (3) 252SE / 252XE / 252SD: When replacing
                                                                 the BCU fuse, remove the screws, and
                                                                 then remove the fuse. Install the spare
                                                                 fuse, and then tighten the screws.
                                                              (4) When replacing an accessory fuse,  re-
                        1  Fuse box cover
                                                                 move the accessory fuse holder or cov-
                                                                 er. (Open the rear underseat storage
                                                                 compartment [port] to access the acces-
                                                                 sory fuse. [See page 106.])



















                        194]]></page><page Index="203"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 195  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery


                                            2 3 4 5             Fuse amperage:
                                                                  Electronic throttle valve fuse:
                                                                    10 A
                                            9  8  7  6            Fuel pump fuse:
                                                                    10 A
                                                                  Main relay drive fuse:
                                                                    10 A
                                                1
                                                                  Main fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  Battery fuse (AR250 / SX250 / 252S):
                        1  Accessory fuse cover
                                                                    30 A
                        2  Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/
                           Switch Panel fuse                      BCU fuse:
                                                                    50 A (252SE / 252XE / 252SD)
                        3  CLH/CLG/Power Port/USB fuse
                        4  Horn fuse                              Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/
                        5  Bilge pump fuse                        Switch Panel fuse:
                        6  Power distribution module fuse           20 A
                        7  USB fuse                               CLH/CLG/Power Port/USB fuse:
                        8  Accessory 2 fuse                         20 A
                        9  Accessory 1 fuse                       Horn fuse:
                                                                    7.5 A
                        (5) Replace the blown fuse with the spare
                                                                  Bilge pump fuse:
                            fuse of the correct amperage by using
                                                                    4 A
                            the fuse puller.
                                                                  Power distribution module fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  USB fuse:
                                                                    3 A
                                                                  Accessory 1 fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  Accessory 2 fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                                                              (6) Install the fuse box cover.
                                                              (7) If an accessory fuse was replaced, install
                                                                 the accessory fuse holder or cover.
                                                              (8) Close the engine hood.











                                                                                             195]]></page><page Index="204"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 196  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Trouble recovery

                        Running on one engine                 Towing the boat
                         NOTICE                                   WARNING

                        Do not operate the boat above a no-wake   The  operator of  the towing boat  must
                        speed with just one engine.            keep  speed to a minimum  and avoid
                        Severe engine damage could result be-  traffic or obstacles  which could be  a
                        cause water can flood the non-operating  hazard to either boat.
                        engine through the water intake.       The towing line should be long enough
                                                               so the towed boat will not collide with
                        If one engine becomes inoperative, the prop-
                                                               the towing boat when slowing down.
                        erly running engine can be used to return to
                        shore. Operate at a no-wake speed to pre-  The boat should be towed only if it becomes
                        vent water from flooding the non-operating  inoperative.
                        engine  through  the water intake. The no-  The towing rope should be long enough so
                        wake mode can be used for  this purpose.  that the boat will not collide with the towing
                        (See pages 49 and 74.)                boat when slowing  down. A good rule of
                                                              thumb is a tow rope which is three times the
                                                              combined length of the towing boat and the
                                                              boat.
                                                              Tow the boat using the bow eye only. Tow the
                                                              boat at a no-wake speed. NOTICE: Do not
                                                              tow the boat at speed fast enough to leave
                                                              a wake (8 km/h, 5 mph). Severe engine
                                                              damage could result because water can
                                                              flood the non-operating engines through
                                                              the water intakes.










                                                                   1



                                                              1  Bow eye









                        196]]></page><page Index="205"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 197  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                               Consumer information

                                                   Limited warranty































































                                                                                             197]]></page><page Index="206"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 198  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Consumer information


































































                        198]]></page><page Index="207"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 199  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                               Consumer information

                                       YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE (Y.E.S.)










                          Keep your Yamaha Boat protected even after   sonable expenses you incur because your
                          the 1-year warranty coverage provisions  Yamaha needs covered service: replace-
                          expire with genuine Yamaha Extended Service  ment vehicle rental, emergency towing,
                          (Y.E.S.).                             phone calls, even food and lodging when
                                                                you are away from home. This superb cov-
                          Y.E.S. is designed and administered by  erage goes into effect when you purchase
                          Yamaha Motor Corporation to provide maxi-  Y.E.S., so it applies to any warranty repairs
                          mum owner satisfaction.You get uninterrupted  as well as covered repairs during your entire
                          factory-backed coverage for extra peace of
                                                                Y.E.S. plan period.
                          mind.
                                                              • Y.E.S. coverage is honored at any autho-
                          • Y.E.S. is flexible. You choose the plan that’s   rized Yamaha dealer nationwide.
                           right for you: 12 months, 24 months,  36
                           months, or up to 48 months on certain mod-  • Y.E.S. coverage is transferable to a new
                           els   beyond the 1-year warranty coverage pe-  owner if you sell or trade-in. That can make
                           riod. That means you can get up to 5 years   your Yamaha Boat much more valuable!
                           of coverage on the power train, controls, and
                           other components to match the comforting   This excellent Y.E.S. plan coverage is only
                           5-year standard protection on the hull.  available to Yamaha owners like you, and only
                                                              while your Yamaha is still within the first year
                          • Y.E.S. is designed and administered by the   of the  Yamaha Limited  Warranty period. So
                           same Yamaha people who handle your war-  visit your authorized Yamaha dealer to get all
                           ranty–and it shows in the comprehensive  the facts. He can show you how easy it is to
                           coverage benefits. There are no limitations   protect your investment with Yamaha Extended
                           on hours of use. Coverage isn’t limited to   Service. We urge you to act now. You’ll get
                           “moving parts” or the “drive train” like many  the excellent benefits of TRIP coverage right
                           other plans. And Y.E.S. covers manufactur-  away, and you’ll rest easy knowing you’ll have
                           ing defects just like the warranty. See the   strong factory-backed protection even after
                           sample contract at your Yamaha dealer to   your Yamaha Limited  Warranty expires. See
                           see how comforting uninterrupted factory-  your dealer today!
                           backed protection can be.
                                                              A special note:
                          • You don’t have to pay anything for cov-
                           ered repairs. There’s no deductible to pay,  If visiting your dealer isn’t convenient, contact
                           and repairs aren’t “prorated.” You don’t have  Yamaha with your Primary ID number or Hull
                           any “out-of-pocket” expenses for covered  Identification Number. We’ll be happy to help
                           repairs.                           you get the Y.E.S. coverage you need.
                          • In addition,  Travel and Recreation      Yamaha Service Marketing
                           Interruption Protection (TRIP) is included  P.O. Box 6555
                           at no extra cost. TRIP gives you up to $250   Cypress, CA 90630
                           reimbursement per occurrence for any rea-  1-(866)-YES-EXTD
                                                                     (1-866-937-3983)





                                                                                             199]]></page><page Index="208"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 200  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Consumer information

                                                   Sample float plan
                        Leave a float plan with a responsible person on shore before boating. The example below can
                        be copied and used.


                                                     FLOAT PLAN
                                                   VESSEL INFORMATION
                           BOAT MAKE:      Yamaha              MOTOR TYPE:  Jet
                           MODEL:
                           LENGTH:                             REGISTRATION NO:
                           DECK COLOR:                         HULL COLOR:
                                                       PASSENGER
                           OPERATOR                            EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #1:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #2:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #3:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #4:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                                                  DEPARTURE INFORMATION
                           POINT OF DEPARTURE:                 DATE/TIME:
                           TOW VEHICLE            LICENSE:     TRAILER LICENSE:
                           MAKE / MODEL
                                                 DESTINATION INFORMATION
                           DESTINATION:       LORAN OR GPS COORDINATES:   INTENDED ACTIVITY:




                           EXPECTED RETURN    DATE:                       TIME:
                           LOCAL U.S. COAST GUARD PHONE #:
                           NOTES:               HULL COLOR:

                           OPERATOR                            EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #1:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:




                        200]]></page><page Index="209"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 201  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                         Index

                        A                                     Bimini top (SX250).................................. 128
                        Access port cap check .......................... 144  Bimini top, trailering (AR250 / 252S /
                        Additional equipment                   252XE)................................................. 126
                          recommendations................................. 17  Bimini top, trailering (SX250).................. 130
                        Anchor light (252S / 252SE / 252XE /   Blower checks........................................ 147
                          252SD)................................................ 113  “BLOWER” switch.................................... 71
                        Anchor light (AR250) .............................. 113  Boarding from a dock or landing jetty.... 160
                        Anchor light (SX250) .............................. 114  Boarding from the bow .......................... 160
                        Anchor storage compartment................ 103  Boarding from the water ........................ 160
                        Anchoring............................................... 162  Boat characteristics ................................. 18
                        Approval labels of emission control   Boat control functions.............................. 37
                          certificate................................................ 2  Boating with passengers........................ 158
                                                              Bow ladder............................................. 115
                        B
                        Backing your trailer................................ 167  C
                        Basic stain guide.................................... 173  Check engine warning........................ 68, 96
                        Batteries and battery switches ................ 37  Cleaning the boat................................... 171
                        Battery care............................................ 174  Communication error warning............ 69, 97
                        Battery check......................................... 146  Controller ...........................................48, 73
                        Beaching................................................ 162  Cooling water pilot outlet check ............ 151
                        Bilge pump............................................. 137  Crossing wakes and swells.................... 163
                        “BILGE” switch .................................. 46, 71  Cruise assist....................................... 48, 73
                        Bilge water check................................... 146  Cruising limitations................................... 14
                        Bilge water, draining .............................. 136
                        Bilge water, draining on land ................. 136  D
                        Bilge water, draining on water ............... 137  Depth warning.................................... 69, 97
                        Bimini top (252SE / 252SD) ................... 127  Docking.................................................. 160
                        Bimini top (AR250 / 252S / 252XE) ........ 123  Drain plug check ....................................146
                        Bimini top, installing (252SE / 252SD) ... 128  Drive control screen ................................. 85
                        Bimini top, installing (AR250 / 252S /   DRiVE mode (252SD) ............................... 79
                          252XE) ................................................ 127  Driver’s seat ............................................. 99
                        Bimini top, installing (SX250) ................. 131  Driver’s side console compartment ....... 107
                        Bimini top, removing (252SE / 252SD)... 127  Driving your boat....................................152
                        Bimini top, removing (AR250 / 252S /   E
                          252XE) ................................................ 126  Emergency procedures.......................... 188
                        Bimini top, removing (SX250)................. 131  Emission control information ..................... 2
                        Bimini top, setting up (AR250 /       Enclosed head compartment................. 106
                          252S / 252XE)..................................... 123  Engine break-in ...................................... 139
                        Bimini top, setting up (SX250)................ 128  Engine covers, removing and
                        Bimini top, storing (AR250 / 252S /    installing.............................................. 177
                          252XE) ................................................ 125  Engine hood ........................................... 103
                        Bimini top, storing in the fully      Engine oil................................................ 133
                          collapsed position (SX250) ................. 130  Engine oil, checking ............................... 134
                        Bimini top, storing in the upright    Engine oil level check............................. 145
                          position (SX250).................................. 129
                                                              Engine oil requirement ........................... 133

                                                                                             201]]></page><page Index="210"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 202  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                        Index

                        Engine serial numbers................................ 1  Jet pump, cleaning................................. 188
                        Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) check..... 150  Joystick, using ......................................... 46
                        Engine shut-off switch ............................. 37  Jump-starting......................................... 193
                        Engine shut-off switch check................. 150
                        Enjoy your boat responsibly..................... 25  L
                                                              Labels, important ....................................... 6
                        F                                     Labels, other ............................................12
                        Fire extinguisher check.......................... 142  Labels, warning.......................................... 8
                        Fire extinguisher, operating ................... 143  Launching...............................................168
                        Fire extinguisher, storing........................ 143  Learning to operate your boat................ 152
                        Float mode............................................... 79  Leaving a dock....................................... 156
                        Flushing the cooling system .................. 170  Lifting .....................................................169
                        Front underseat storage               Limitations on who may operate the
                          compartments .................................... 104  boat.......................................................13
                        Front walk-through................................. 111  Limited warranty ....................................197
                        Fuel ........................................................ 132  Loading .................................................. 168
                        Fuel level check ..................................... 151  Long-term storage ................................. 175
                        Fuel requirement .................................... 132  Low fuel level warning........................ 69, 97
                        Fuel system checks ............................... 144  Low oil pressure warning ................... 68, 96
                        Fuel system, long-term storage ............. 175  Low voltage warning ................................97
                        Fuse replacement .................................. 194  Lubrication ............................................. 175

                        G                                     M
                        Galley storage compartment (252S /    Main components, location...................... 27
                          252SE / 252XE / 252SD)..................... 109  Main switch (252SE / 252XE / 252SD)..... 39
                        Getting to know your boat ..................... 152  Main switches (AR250 / SX250 / 252S) ... 39
                        Glossary, boat.......................................... 26  Maintenance........................................... 177
                        Glove compartment ............................... 108  Manufactured date labels .......................... 3
                        Grease points......................................... 175  Map screen ........................................ 55, 80
                                                              Media screen......................................60, 86
                        H                                     Multi-function display elements......... 51, 76
                        Hazard information................................... 17  Multi-function display unit
                        Helm controls (252S / 252SE /          operation......................................... 46, 72
                          252XE / 252SD) .................................... 70
                        Helm controls (AR250 / SX250) ............... 45  N
                        High voltage warning ............................... 97  “NAV LIGHTS” switch .............................. 71
                        Hitch....................................................... 166  Night operation ........................................ 19
                        Home screen...................................... 55, 80  No-wake mode................................... 49, 74
                        Horn check............................................. 149
                        “HORN” switch .................................. 46, 71  O
                        Hull Identification Number (HIN) ................ 1  Operation mode ....................................... 79
                                                              Operational requirements ........................ 15
                        I                                     Over temperature warning ................. 68, 96
                        Identification number records.................... 1  Owner’s/operator’s manual.................... 177
                        J                                     P
                        Jet intake checks ................................... 144  Passenger’s seat....................................101

                        202]]></page><page Index="211"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 203  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM



                                                                                         Index

                        Periodic maintenance chart ................... 179  Stopping the engines............................. 155
                        Post-launch checks ............................... 150  Storage compartments .......................... 103
                        Post-operation care ............................... 170  Stowable table ....................................... 108
                        Post-operation checks........................... 164  Swim platform........................................ 116
                        Power steering system will not        Swim platform seat (252S / 252SE /
                          operate (252SD).................................. 191  252SD) ................................................ 101
                        Pre-launch checks ................................. 141  Swim platform shower (252S /
                        Pre-operation check points ................... 141  252SE / 252SD) .................................. 117
                        Pre-operation checklist.......................... 140  Switch panel (252S / 252SE / 252SD)...... 71
                        Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number ...... 1  Switch panel (AR250 / SX250) ................. 46
                                                              System control screen ....................... 63, 89
                        R
                        Raising the shift gates (252SE /      T
                          252XE / 252SD) .................................. 190  Throttle/shift paddles (252SD) ................. 42
                        Rear underseat storage compartment    Throttle/shift paddles checks (252SD)... 142
                          (port) ................................................... 106  Tilt lever.................................................... 44
                        Rear underseat storage compartment    To get more boating safety information... 25
                          (starboard) .......................................... 105  Towing the boat ..................................... 196
                        Rear walk-through ................................. 111  Trailering checklist ................................. 166
                        Remote control keypad.......................... 119  Trailering the boat .................................. 166
                        Remote control lever checks ................. 141  Trip screen ......................................... 59, 84
                        Remote control levers.............................. 40  Troubleshooting ..................................... 185
                        Required equipment ................................ 16  Troubleshooting chart............................ 185
                        Reverse RPM control......................... 49, 75  Turning the boat..................................... 157
                        Rules of the road...................................... 20
                        Running mode.......................................... 79  U
                        Running on one engine.......................... 196  Underwater seat..................................... 102
                                                              USB chargers......................................... 120
                        S
                        Sample float plan ................................... 200  W
                        Screen tab bar ......................................... 77  Wakeboard tower, collapsing and
                        Seats........................................................ 98  setting up (252SE / 252SD) ................ 122
                        Setting screen.................................... 63, 90  Wakeboard tower, collapsing and
                        Side table ............................................... 119  setting up (AR250 / 252S / 252XE) ..... 121
                        Single lever mode .................................... 79  Wakeboard tower (except for SX250) .... 121
                        Ski locker ............................................... 104  Wakeboarding and water-skiing .............. 19
                        Specifications......................................... 182  Walk-through ......................................... 111
                        Star labels (4-star models) ......................... 3  Warnings .................................................. 94
                        Starting the engines............................... 152  Wet storage compartment ..................... 110
                        “START/STOP” buttons (252SE /         Windshield.............................................. 112
                          252XE / 252SD) .................................... 39  Y
                        Status indicator bar.................................. 78  YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE
                        Steering.................................................... 43  (Y.E.S.) ................................................ 199
                        Steering system checks......................... 141
                        Stern ladder ........................................... 116
                        Stern storage compartments ................. 110
                        Stopping the boat .................................. 159
                                                                                             203]]></page><page Index="212"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F4Y11.book  Page 1  Wednesday, May 19, 2021  11:34 AM










                        For your best ownership experience, think Genuine Yamaha!

                        Genuine Yamaha Parts – Genuine Yamaha replacement parts are the exact same
                        parts as the ones originally equipped on your vehicle, providing you with the
                        performance and durability you have come to expect. Why settle for aftermarket parts
                        that may not provide full confidence and satisfaction?

                        Genuine Yamaha Accessories – Yamaha only offers accessories that meet our
                        high standards for quality and performance. Buy with confidence, knowing your
                        Genuine Yamaha Accessories will fit right and perform right – right out of the box.

                        Yamalube – Take care of your Yamaha with legendary Yamalube oils, lubricants,
                        and care products. They’re formulated and approved by the toughest judges we
                        know: the Yamaha engineering teams that know your Yamaha from the inside out.

                        Genuine Yamaha Service Manuals – Get the same factory manual for your vehicle
                        that the technicians at your authorized Yamaha dealer use. Service manuals are
                        available through your Yamaha dealer or you can order them directly through
                        yamahapubs.com.

                        Genuine Yamaha products are available only from your Yamaha dealer.

                        Find out more at yamaha-motor.com]]></page></pages></Search>
